JP2021126548A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing storage capacity.SOLUTION: A game machine includes specific information determination means for determining whether specific information is included in predetermined data selected from first storage means by first selection means, conversion means for performing predetermined conversion to one predetermined data according to a situation of a game when it is determined that specific information is included in one predetermined data by the specific information determination means, and second selection means for selecting one setting value from second storage means and for setting it, based on one predetermined data subjected to predetermined conversion by the conversion means, thus performing a different conversion to one predetermined data according to a situation of a game by the conversion means, and selecting a different setting value. Therefore, capacity of the first storage means can be reduced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines notify the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening by displaying a plurality of symbols on a display means such as a liquid crystal display. In such a gaming machine, when a plurality of variablely displayed symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific combination, a so-called hit state that is advantageous to the player is entered. In this symbol variation, if one more symbol is aligned, the jackpot state will continue for a longer time than usual, so-called reach state will be generated, characters will appear, and so on. By doing so, the player's expectation is raised.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-230714

However, as the mode of symbol variation is diversified, the amount of data stored in the gaming machine increases, which causes a problem that the capacity of the storage means mounted on the gaming machine is increased.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of the storage means.

A control means that controls the game according to a predetermined control procedure, a first storage means that stores a plurality of predetermined data, and a predetermined data stored in the first storage means are selected, and the control means is the game. A second storage means that stores a plurality of set values for making settings related to, a first selection means that selects one predetermined data from the first storage means, and predetermined data selected by the first selection means. 1 The setting value of 1 is selected from the second storage means based on the conversion means that performs a predetermined conversion on the predetermined data according to the situation of the game and the predetermined data of the 1 that has been subjected to the predetermined conversion by the conversion means. It is provided with a second selection means for setting.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the predetermined one according to claim 1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the specific information is not included in the predetermined data according to claim 1. A third selection means for selecting and setting the set value of 1 from the second storage means based on the data is provided.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the specific information determining means applies to the predetermined data of 1 when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1. It is determined that specific information is included.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data are stored by the first storage means, selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of set values for the control means to make settings related to the game are set by the second storage means. It will be remembered. A predetermined data of 1 is selected from the first storage means by the first selection means, and whether or not the predetermined data selected by the first selection means contains specific information is determined by the specific information discriminating means. .. When it is determined by the specific information determining means that the predetermined data of 1 contains specific information, the conversion means performs a predetermined conversion on the predetermined data of 1, and the conversion means performs the predetermined conversion. Based on the predetermined data of 1, the set value of 1 is selected and set from the second storage means by the second selection means.

As a result, different conversions can be performed on the predetermined data of 1 according to the situation of the game by the conversion means, so that the second selection means can select different setting values according to the conversion contents. Therefore, the number of predetermined data stored in the first storage means can be made smaller than the number of set values stored in the second storage means, so that the capacity of the first storage means can be reduced. There is an effect.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the predetermined data of 1 does not include specific information, 1 Since the set value of 1 is selected and set from the second storage means by the third storage means based on the predetermined data of the above, when the predetermined data of 1 that does not include specific information is selected, the conversion means. Conversion by is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that processing addition can be reduced when specific information is not included in the predetermined data of 1.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1, the predetermined information of 1 is determined by the specific information determining means. Since it is determined that the data contains specific information, it is necessary to determine the data specified in the bits other than the most significant bit when determining whether or not the data contains specific information. It is possible to make a determination with a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load by the specific information discriminating means can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C3 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit setting table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 1 off-selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 2 off-selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the offset setting table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the game result setting table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the description contents of the state setting table in an actual program. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the clear table at the end of a big hit schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of various setting value storage areas schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a register schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface C. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot time setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the game result setting value acquisition processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the setting process at the time of disconnection executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image variation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table for low probability in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is the high probability in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the random number table per hour first. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the example of the description contents of the 1st random number table in the actual program in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the offset setting table of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process executed by the MPU of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the off-set setting process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a jackpot in the first hit type counter C2 and the special symbol in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship with a type typically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation type selection table in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) and (c) show the contents of the promotion period selection table in the third embodiment. It is a figure shown schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the selection table for the promotion period in the third embodiment, and (b) and (c) are the selection tables for the end of the promotion period in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the offset setting table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the variation pattern selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the selection table at the time of disengagement in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are explanatory views explaining the case where the rank-up fails in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) and (b) are explanatory views explaining the case of rank-up from rank D to rank C in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the case of rank-up from rank C to rank B in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram in the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case of rank-up from rank B to rank A in the rank-up effect executed after the end of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case of rank-up from rank A to rank S in the rank-up effect executed after the end of a jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) is a rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case of notifying that the rank has been raised to the maximum rank within the rank-up period, and (b) is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case of notifying the fact that the rank up could not be up to the maximum rank within the rank up period in the rank up effect executed after the end of a big hit in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process executed by the MPU of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot time setting process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the off-set setting process 3 executed by the MPU of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation type selection table in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is the selection table for non-probability variation in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the content of the selection table for probability variation hit in the modification of the 3rd Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the selection table at the time of a detachment in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process executed by the MPU of the main control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the disconnection time setting process 4 executed by the MPU of the main control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (starting prize), which will be described later, are themes given to each stage. It is designed to be done according to. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64a, the second ball entry port 64b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64a, the second entry opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. If this is the case, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball opening 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released and the opening is repeated multiple times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are four types of jackpots for special symbols, "Big hit A" to "Big hit D". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player. Details will be described later, but for example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the game value that the normal symbol will continue to be shortened until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the jackpot ends is given. If the jackpot type is "big hit B", the game value of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot ends.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds to 30 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started. The specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64a. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64a. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64a becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 64b, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, four types of "big hit A" to "big hit D" are provided.

When it becomes a "normal jackpot", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpot), but no added value is given after the jackpot ends. That is, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state, and does not shift to the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving).

When it becomes "Big hit A (time saving big hit)", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8 rounds big hit), and after that, as an added value after the big hit, "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving middle) ). Specifically, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. In the present embodiment, the number of lottery of the special symbol defines the period during which the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, but for example, the number of times the variation of the special symbol ends may be specified.

Also, if you win "Big hit B (Probability change jackpot)", "Big hit C (Hidden probability change jackpot)", or "Big hit D (Rare latent probability change jackpot)", the number of rounds is 8 rounds in the special game state (8 rounds). It becomes a big hit), and then it shifts to a "high probability state of a special symbol" as an added value after the big hit ends. In addition, when the player wins the "big hit B (probability change jackpot)", the player is notified that the player has shifted to the "high probability state of the special symbol", but the "big hit C (latent probability change jackpot)", Or, the notification is not performed in "Big hit D (rare latent probability change big hit)". Therefore, even if it is not notified that the player has transitioned to the "high probability state of the special symbol", the player is informed of "big hit C (latent probability variable jackpot)" or "big hit D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)". You can expect that you were elected. That is, it can be expected that the state is "high probability state of special symbol".

Furthermore, when "Big hit C (latent probability variation big hit)" is won, it is selected when the content of the variable effect selected when the big hit is notified or when the deviation of the special symbol is notified after the big hit is completed. The display content of the variable pattern effect is the same as that of "Big hit A (time saving big hit)". That is, it is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether the player has won the "big hit A (short-time big hit)" or the "big hit C (latent probability variation big hit)". On the other hand, when the "big hit D (rare latent probability variation jackpot)" is won, the jackpot is notified as compared with the case where the "big hit A (time saving jackpot)" or "big hit B (latent probability variation jackpot)" is won. It is configured so that it is easy to select a variation pattern effect having a high degree of expectation when a special symbol is notified of a deviation after a big hit. Therefore, even if it is not notified that the state has shifted to the "high probability state of the special symbol", the fluctuation pattern production of the mode with high expectation is selected, and the "big hit D (rare latent probability change big hit)" is selected. It is possible to expect that the player has won the prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (big hit). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time reduction state" (normal symbol time reduction middle) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

After that, the period from the end of the big hit of the special symbol to the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, that is, from the end of "big hit A" to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. Is called the time saving period of ordinary symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases even during the probability change of the special symbol. As mentioned above, in the case of "Big hit A", the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times, but when it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, , The probability of hitting a normal symbol will remain increased until the next big hit is won. That is, when the "big hit B" to "big hit D" are won, the player can wait for the next big hit without reducing the number of balls, which is an advantageous big hit for the player. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various gaming states such as a jackpot state, a time saving state of a normal symbol, and a probability variation state of a special symbol, thereby improving the interest of the player. There is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "big hit A" is won, the time saving period of the normal symbol is set to 100 times, but the time saving period is not limited to this. For example, 20 times or 150 times may be selected as the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. Further, instead of the number of lottery of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses. In addition, instead of setting the "normal symbol time reduction state", the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the second entrance 64b can be lengthened, or the electric accessory can be hit by one normal symbol. You may open things more often. Further, the number of rounds and the closing conditions of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, and for example, a jackpot of 4 rounds or a jackpot of 16 rounds may be provided or specified. As a closing condition of the winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, for example, a condition "until 3 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won" or "until 10 seconds have passed or 5 balls have been won". You may set a jackpot with the condition "until you do". Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to either the "high probability state of the special symbol" or the "time saving state of the normal symbol", but the jackpot ends. Until the lottery of special symbols is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the system is configured to be in a "high probability state of special symbols", and after the lottery of special symbols is completed a predetermined number of times, the lottery is completed. In addition to shifting to the "low probability state of the special symbol", it may be configured to be the "time saving state of the normal symbol" or the "normal state of the normal symbol".

Further, in the present embodiment, the added value given to the player after the end of the big hit is common regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, but the game is played after the end of the big hit according to the game state when the big hit is won. The added value given to the person may be different. For example, if the "big hit A" is won during the normal state of the normal symbol, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is set to 100 times, and if the "big hit A" is won during the normal state of the normal symbol, the time reduction of the normal symbol is set. The period may be 50 times.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64a or the second entry opening 64b is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, the first ball entrance 64a, or the second ball is entered. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the mouth 64b, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the ball. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a and the ball entering the second ball entry port 64b may be held up to four times each. Further, when the fluctuation is executed according to the reserved ball, the variation may be executed in the order in which the balls are entered without considering the type of the ball entrance, and when the reserved ball exists, the second Priority may be given to entering the ball into the ball entry port 64b. Further, the jackpot winning probability and the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be changed between the first entry port 64a and the second entry opening 64b.

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (“big hit A” to “big hit D”). ) Is shown as a special symbol (first symbol).

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b (starting prize), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with this as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is any of "big hit A", "big hit C", and "big hit D", the even number "0,2,4,6,8" is added to the main symbol. A variable display is performed in which the numbers are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned. With this configuration, the jackpot type can be recognized simply by checking the aligned main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper 4/5 is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/5 is the sub-display area Ds that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b, is displayed. NS.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball enters the ball. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the sub-display area Ds. In the sub-display area Ds, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is displayed. Indicates that is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. The display is done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, as in the case of the 1st ball entrance port 64a and the 2nd ball entry port 64b. Alternatively, it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64a into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64a, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64a is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

Below the first ball entry port 64a, a second ball entry port 64b into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entry port 64b, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second entry port 64b is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, as in the case of the first entry port 64a. Since the upper side of the second ball entry port 64b is shielded by the first ball entry port 64a, it is usually difficult to allow the ball to enter the ball. As described above, by hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is opened, and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. That is, it is configured so that the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b during the probability change of the special symbol that is likely to hit the ordinary symbol or during the short period of time of the ordinary symbol.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second entry opening 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, has a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have been won, or 0.5 seconds have passed, or a ball. Will be released (until 10 wins).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated as many times as the number of times according to the jackpot type. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box will be opened. It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from a certain RAM 203, ROM 202 or RAM 203, or writing various data to RAM 203, and an interrupt circuit. Various circuits such as a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, etc. are built-in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling the processing of the main control device 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, the processing of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a third symbol display. This is the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting the display in the device 81.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. Etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C3 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C3. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball at 64a or the second entry port 64b. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entry ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 249), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 249 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 249), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 249, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 249. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, and is the first random number. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers that become big hits different in this way, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol are the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 199). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 199 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 199). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the same timing.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 249. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "7,107,240" are the first for the low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,15,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,90, 99,106,110,112,122,134,140,151,160,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,238,249 "is the first random number table for high probability. It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In the present embodiment, the random number value that becomes the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability time and the random number that becomes the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability time. Random numbers that are the jackpots for each are set so that they do not overlap with the numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. It may be easier. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit A (time saving jackpot)". The jackpot type when the value is "100 to 179" is "big hit B (probability variation jackpot)", and the jackpot type when the value is "180 to 194" is "big hit C (latent probability variation)". The jackpot type is "big hit D (rare latent probability variation jackpot)" when the value is "195-199". As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that one of four types of hit types (big hit A to big hit D) is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). Depending on the fluctuation type counter CS1, for example, "complete deviation" where reach does not occur, "short reach" where the fluctuation time is relatively short, "long reach" where the fluctuation time is relatively long, "super reach" where the fluctuation time is the longest, etc. A rough display mode is determined. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type data for determining the variation time of the symbol variation are associated with each other, and the variation type selection table 202d (FIG. 8 (a)). The variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The details will be described later, but the variable type selection table 202d includes a table that is referred to when a big hit is won (a winning selection table 202d1) and a table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery is missed. It is provided. Furthermore, there are two types of tables that are referred to when the special symbol lottery is missed. Specifically, a table (special drawing 1 removal selection table 202d2) that is referred to when the ball enters the first entry port 64a and the special symbol lottery is missed, and the ball is the second entry. There is provided a table (special drawing 2 removal selection table 202d3) that is referred to when the ball enters the mouth 64b and the lottery of the special symbol is missed. Further, as compared with the case where the variation type data is selected from the special figure 1 deviation selection table 202d2, when the variation type data is selected from the special figure 2 deviation selection table 202d3, the variation type data corresponding to the complete deviation is obtained. The selection rate is set high. With this configuration, during the probability change of the special symbol, which is in a state where it is easy to enter the second entry port 64b, and during the time saving state of the normal symbol, a short change occurs when the special symbol is not drawn. It is possible to make it easier to select the time fluctuation pattern production. By shortening the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern production, the player can feel that the period until the next jackpot is short, and the jackpot can be felt to be continuous in a short period. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The second random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C3 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C3. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C3 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 7C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C3 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C3 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is "0.2 seconds x 1 time." However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C3 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and it is attached to the second entrance 64b. Since the opening period of the electric accessory is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time-> 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C), which stores the random number value for determining whether or not the symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C3, is stored in the ROM 202. It is provided. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is "1 second x 2 times". However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C3 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register of the register 210 are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 35) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 has various settings such as a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a value storage area 203e.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , The first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b (starting winning), and the acquired values are acquired. The data is stored in order from the vacant area of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the respective values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b, and each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1 is acquired according to the starting winning. Immediately after that, apart from the big hit lottery of the original special symbol, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from each value of each of the acquired counters C1, C2, CS1. .. In this way, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1) before the original special symbol lottery is performed. Predicting the information is described as pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, as various information, whether it is right or wrong, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. Store in 223a.

Like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C3 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is the execution area. Based on the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases as the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 25).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 25 and S705 in FIG. 30). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S904 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S805 in FIG. 31).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S905 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S903: No in FIG. 32).

The various setting value storage areas 203e are storage areas in which various setting values, flags, counters, and the like for executing the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 controls based on the data stored in the various set value storage areas 203e. The various set value storage areas 203e will be described later with reference to FIG.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201 are defined in the ROM 202. The contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 14. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , The variation type selection table 202d, the offset setting table 202e, the variation pattern selection table 202f, the game result setting table 202g, the state setting table 202h, and the jackpot end clear table 202i are stored at least.

As described above, the first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter C1 is stored. When any of the random number values specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer match, it is determined as a big hit of a special symbol. NS.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 7B, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 99, the jackpot this time is "big hit A (time saving jackpot)". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 100 to 179, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit B (probability variable jackpot)". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 180 to 194, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit C (latent probability variation jackpot)", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 195 to 199. If so, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit D (rare latent probability variation jackpot)".

After the end of the big hit, the random value that becomes the big hit that shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol is set to 100 of 0 to 99. On the other hand, the number of random numbers for the jackpot (big hit B to jackpot D) that shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is set to 100 from 100 to 199. That is, the ratio of the jackpot that shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot and the jackpot that shifts to the low-probability state of the special symbol is 1: 1. In addition, among the jackpots that shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol, the random value that becomes the jackpot (big hit C, jackpot D) that the player is not notified of the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol is 180 to 199. It is set to 20 pieces. That is, it is configured so that the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is not notified once every five times when the jackpot that shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol is won. As a result, even if it is not notified that the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, the player is transitioned to the special symbol high probability state (that is, the jackpot C or the jackpot D. You can continue the game while expecting (winning).

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 7C, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), when the value of the random number counter C3 for the second hit is in the range of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened "1 second x 2 times".

The variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is a data table in which the correspondence between the variation type data for determining the rough display mode of the variation pattern and the variation type counter CS1 is defined. In the variable type selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of the ball entry port into which the ball has entered are defined. The variation type data selected from the variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is converted into an offset value (pattern selection offset value) based on the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10) described later. Then, the content defined in the address that is offset by the offset value from the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set as the variation pattern type.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the variation type selection table 202d includes a hit selection table 202d1, a special figure 1 deviation selection table 202d2, and a special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3. There is. The winning selection table 202d1 is a table for selecting variable type data when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the special symbol 1 removal selection table 202d2 is used when the special symbol lottery (the special symbol 1 lottery) performed based on the ball entering the first entry port 64a is missed. It is a table for selecting variable type data, and the special figure 2 off selection table 202d3 is a lottery of special symbols (special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entry port 64b. This is a table for selecting variable type data when the lottery) is out of order.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8B to 11, the flow from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) to the selection of the variation pattern type will be specifically described.

FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a hit selection table 202d1 for selecting variation type data based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 when it is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol. As shown in FIG. 8B, there are three types of fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the case of a big hit of a special symbol: "hit short reach", "hit long reach", and "hit super reach". On the other hand, the variation type data 00H, 01H, and 02H are associated with each other. Then, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H (per short reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if the value is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H (per long reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data. If it is selected and is in the range of 180 to 199, 02H (per super reach) is selected as the variation type data. These fluctuation type data are converted into a pattern selection offset value which is a value used for selecting the fluctuation pattern type by the offset setting table 202e described later, and the fluctuation pattern selection table described later is based on the fluctuation pattern selection offset value. The fluctuation pattern type is selected from 202f.

FIG. 9A shows variable type data when the special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is out of order. It is a figure which showed the special figure 1 deviation selection table 202d2 for selection. As shown in FIG. 9A, the modes of the variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is out of order are "completely out of order", "out of short reach", "out of long reach", and "out of supermarket". There are four types of "reach", and variable type data 03H, 04H, 05H, and 06H are associated with these, respectively.

If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 164, 03H (complete deviation) is selected as the variation type data, and if the value is in the range of 165 to 184, 04H (out of short reach) is selected as the variation type data. If it is in the range of 185 to 194, 05H is selected as the variation type data, and if it is in the range of 195 to 199, 06H is selected as the variation type data. These fluctuation type data are also converted into pattern selection offset values using the offset setting table 202e and used to select the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, as in the case of the jackpot.

FIG. 9B shows variable type data when the lottery for special symbols (lottery for special symbols 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entry port 64b is out of order. It is a figure which showed the special figure 2 deviation selection table 202d3 for selection. As shown in FIG. 9B, the modes of the variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is out of order are "completely out of order", "out of short reach", "out of long reach", and "out of supermarket". There are four types of "reach", and variable type data 07H, 08H, 09H, and 0AH are associated with each of these.

If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 184, 07H (complete deviation) is selected as the variation type data. That is, it is set so that the rate at which complete deviation is selected is higher than when the ball enters the first entry port 64a. Further, if it is in the range of 185 to 194, 08H (outside short reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data, if it is in the range of 195 to 198, 09H is selected as the fluctuation type data, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 199. If there is, 0AH is selected as the variation type data. That is, the ratios of the out-of-field short reach, the out-of-order long reach, and the out-of-order super reach are set lower than when the ball enters the first entry port 64a. By increasing the ratio of complete deviation and decreasing the ratio of various deviation reach, it becomes easier to select the fluctuation pattern production with a short fluctuation time in the high probability state of the special symbol or the time reduction state of the normal symbol, so until the next big hit. It is possible to shorten the period of the game, and give the player the impression that the jackpots are continuous in a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. It should be noted that the variation type data selected from the special figure 2 deviation selection table 202d3 also uses the offset setting table 202e to select a pattern, as in the case of a big hit or when the ball enters the first entry port 64a. It is converted into an offset value and used to select the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an offset setting table 202e referred to for determining a pattern selection offset value for selecting a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the variation type data values selected from the variation type selection table 202d are 00H, 01H, 02H, 00H, 01H, 02H are set as the pattern selection offset values from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), respectively. Be selected. On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 03H (complete deviation at the first ball entry port 64a), the pattern selection offset value selected is configured to change according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 03H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 04H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 05H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 06H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. By changing the selected pattern selection offset value according to the number of reserved balls, the selected variable pattern type can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the larger the number of reserved balls, the shorter the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern type is selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress that only the deviation patterns having a long fluctuation period are continuous, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game.

The process of specifying the fluctuation pattern type based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is performed when the data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area. In this case, the winning data stored in the other holding areas is packed in the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller by the shift process, so the pattern selection offset value is selected. The maximum value of the winning data (number of reserved balls) held at the timing is 3. Therefore, the offset value setting table 202e defines the case where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 3.

When the variation type data value selected from the variation type selection table 202d is 04H (off short reach at the first entry port 64a), 07H is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). NS. On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 05H (long reach out of the first ball opening 64a), the pattern selection offset selected according to the number of reserved balls is the same as in the case of complete deviation. The value changes. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 08H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 09H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 0BH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. As a result, as in the case of complete deviation, it is possible to suppress that only the fluctuation patterns of deviation having a long fluctuation period are continuous, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game. can.

When the variation type data value selected from the variation type selection table 202d is 06H (disengagement super reach at the first entry port 64a), 0CH is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). NS. On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 07H (complete deviation at the second entry port 64b), the pattern selection offset value selected changes according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 0DH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 0EH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0FH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. As a result, it is possible to suppress that only the deviation patterns having a long fluctuation period are continuous, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game.

When the variation type data values selected from the variation type selection table 202d are 08H, 09H, and 0AH, 11H, 12H, and 13H are selected as the pattern selection offset values from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), respectively. As described above, the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10) is used to select the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting a variation pattern type based on the pattern selection offset value. The variation pattern selection table 202f is a data table assigned to the range of addresses 1AF5H to 1B08H of the ROM 202, and one variation pattern type is defined for each address. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, "hit super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, "complete deviation B (special figure 1)" with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds, and "disengagement" with a fluctuation time of 19 seconds. "Long reach B (Special Figure 1)" and "Complete deviation D (Special Figure 2)" with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds are specified. Note that FIG. 1 shows the variation based on the ball entering the first entry port 64a, and FIG. 2 shows the variation based on the ball entering the second entry port 64b.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern type when executing the fluctuation is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f and the pattern selection offset value. Specifically, with respect to 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, the variation pattern type defined in the address ahead by the selected pattern selection offset value is determined as the current variation pattern type. It is configured as follows.

For example, when the special symbol is a big hit and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 100, 01H is selected as the variation type data from the hit selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 8B). 01H is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data value and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the variation pattern type this time, the data defined in 1AF6H, which is the address obtained by adding the pattern selection offset value 01H to 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, a "hit long reach" with a fluctuation period of 20 seconds is selected.

Further, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is out of order, the value of the variation type counter is 190, and the number of reserved balls is 2. In, 05H is selected as the variation type data from the selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 9A) for removing the special figure 1. Then, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data, the number of reserved balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the variation pattern type this time, the data specified in 1AFFH, which is the address obtained by adding the pattern selection offset value 0AH to 1AF5, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, "off long reach C (Special Figure 1)" with a fluctuation time of 17 seconds is selected.

Further, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second entry port 64b is out of order, the value of the variation type counter is 20, and the number of reserved balls is 3. 07H is selected as the variation type data from the special figure 2 deviation selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 9B). Then, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data, the number of reserved balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the variation pattern type this time, the data defined in 1B05H, which is the address obtained by adding the pattern selection offset value 10H to 1AF5, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, "complete deviation D (special figure 2)" having a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the variation type counter value CS1, the type of the entry port into which the ball has entered, and the number of reserved balls. It is configured to select. Further, when the entry port where the ball enters is the second entry port 64b, it is easy to select the variation pattern effect of a shorter fluctuation period as compared with the case where the ball enters the first entry opening 64a. It is configured. That is, it is possible to easily select a variation pattern effect having a short variation time during the probability variation of the special symbol, which is a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b, and during the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can feel that the period until the next big hit is short, and the big hit can be made to feel continuous in a short period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the larger the number of reserved balls, the easier it is to select the fluctuation pattern type having a shorter fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress that only the deviation patterns having a long fluctuation period are continuous, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the fluctuation type data value is the same, different fluctuation times are selected according to the number of reserved balls, and the same fluctuation time is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. There is a gap, but it is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation time may be different depending on the number of reserved balls in all the deviations. In addition, if the lottery for the special symbol 1 is missed, only the misses for which the same fluctuation time is selected are selected regardless of the number of reserved balls, and the lottery for the special symbol 2 is missed. May be configured in which only the outliers in which different fluctuation times are selected according to the number of reserved balls are selected. As a result, it is possible to easily select a variation pattern effect having a short variation time during the probability variation of the special symbol, which is a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b, and during the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can feel that the period until the next big hit is short, and the big hit can be made to feel continuous in a short period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to select the fluctuation pattern type according to the number of reserved balls, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the fluctuation type data using the offset setting table 202e. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variable type data with the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the variable type counter value is set in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting to an offset value. Therefore, one of the most important processes in the game, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern effect, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of ROM 202 will be continued. In the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12), when a big hit is won, the setting values such as the setting of the stop symbol indicating the big hit and the operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a during the big hit are set as the big hit type. It is a data table specified for each. The game result setting table 202g will be described with reference to FIG.

The game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12) is stored in the range of the addresses "19D1H" to "19E8H" of the ROM 202, and 1 byte of data is stored in each address. In this game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12), the number of judgment values (random value values) (number of judgment values) for each jackpot type, the lighting patterns (number of display symbols) of a plurality of LEDs 37a, and special symbols are displayed. Information indicating the stop symbol (stop symbol information), the operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (large opening opening pattern), and information for determining the game state after the jackpot is completed (offset value). Is stipulated. In FIG. 12, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is shown in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address is omitted and only the lower byte is shown.

In the pachinko machine 10, based on winning the jackpot, the above setting values according to the winning jackpot type are stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e (FIG. 12) of the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12). 15). Details of the various set value storage areas 203e will be described later. Then, based on the set values stored in the various set value storage areas 203e, the MPU 201 performs various controls related to the variable pattern effect that becomes a big hit and the big hit. Further, in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15), in addition to the storage area for storing the setting values related to the game, the offset value defined in the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12) is stored. Offset value storage area is provided. This offset value is a value used to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

Specifically, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 37) that is executed when it is determined that the jackpot end timing is set, various setting values related to the game state after the jackpot end (whether or not the special symbol is set to the high probability state). It is used to select the setting value indicating the above, the time saving period of the normal symbol, etc.) from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A) and set it in the various setting value storage areas 203e. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random value (counter value) itself acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b (starting winning) is the end of the jackpot. It keeps holding until the time point, and the game state after the end of the big hit is not determined based on the random number value (counter value), and the ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b ( Only the offset value selected based on the random number value (counter value) acquired with the start winning) is held in the jackpot.

Here, if the random number value that becomes the jackpot is held during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of winning the jackpot or during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read by the fraudulent player, and the jackpot becomes a jackpot. The timing at which the random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a risk that a jackpot may be illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into an offset value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the offset value. Therefore, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself, which is the jackpot of the special symbol, is held for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment holds various set values related to the game state after the end of the jackpot (set values indicating whether or not the special symbol is set to the high probability state, the time saving period of the normal symbol, etc.). Instead, only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202h, is stored. Since it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the offset value instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all the various set values in the RAM 203, the storage area of the RAM 203 should be used efficiently. Can be done.

Next, the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. This state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A) is a table in which the gaming states that can be transferred after the end of the jackpot are defined in the order of offset values, and is executed when it is determined that the end timing of the jackpot is reached. It is a data table referred to for setting a game state after the end of a big hit in the big hit end process (see FIG. 37).

The state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD8H to 1AE3H of the ROM 202, and 1 byte of data is stored in each address. In this state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A), information indicating whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (lottery state of the special symbol) and the time reduction of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot are shown. Information indicating whether or not to shift to the state (state of the normal symbol), the time reduction period of the normal symbol given after the jackpot ends (number of time reductions), and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern are provided. The number of lottery of special symbols (number of times of switching the variable pattern selection table) required to switch from the table for after the jackpot to the table according to the state is stipulated. Further, in FIG. 8, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is shown in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is shown.

Subsequently, the description contents of the state setting table 202h in the program will be described with reference to FIG. 13B. FIG. 13B is a simplified diagram showing an example of the description contents of the state setting table 202h of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The left side of FIG. 13B is an example of the description content, and the right side shows the meaning of the description. As shown in FIG. 13B, first, a label "TBL1" is defined as a table name indicating the state setting table 202h. By defining the label name, the start address of the state setting table 202h can be read out by simply describing "TBL1" in other processing. That is, it is not necessary to input the address value itself of the state setting table 202h in other processing. In particular, if the model is changed, the control processing and the number of data stored in the ROM 202 may change. Therefore, when the program used in the pachinko machine 10 is diverted to another game machine, the state setting table 202h is used. The assigned address value may also change. Even in such a case, if the start address of the state setting table 202h is associated with the label "TBL1", the address in each process of reading the state setting table 202h when the program is diverted to another model. There is no need to retype. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a mistake in typing the program when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the mistake in the program.

In the line following the line in which the label is specified, among the data for specifying in the state setting table 202h, the data corresponding to the offset value 00H is described in the order of the stored addresses. Specifically, the data for specifying the address 1AD8H is 00H, the data for specifying the address 1AD9H is 00H, the data for specifying the address 1ADAH is 64H, and the data is specified for the address 1AD9H. A certain 64H is described in one line. The data corresponding to the offset value 01H and the data corresponding to the offset value 02H are also described in one line in the same manner. That is, in one process of reading data from the state setting table 202h and setting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a series of continuously read data is described in one line. By describing the data corresponding to each offset value on one line in this way, there is no omission or duplication in the data corresponding to each offset value (the number of data corresponding to each offset value becomes equal). The designer can easily confirm whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to omission or duplication when defining data.

Further, in the program, the number of data corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h is set in the row between the row in which the data corresponding to the offset value 00H and the row in which the data corresponding to the offset value 01H is specified. , The label "D_SIZE" is defined. By definition, "EQU" means equal and "$" means the current position (the address next to the last data corresponding to the offset value 00H). That is, it is defined that "D_SIZE" is the difference between the next address at the end of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H and "TBL1" (the start address of the state setting table 202h). In the present embodiment, the start address of the state setting table 202h is 1AD8H, and the end address of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H is 1ADBH. Therefore, "D_SIZE" is 0004H, which is the difference between 1ADCH and 1AD8H. ..

By defining the label "D_SIZE" as the number of data in this way, when the number of data in the state setting table 202h is used in other processing, it is sufficient to describe only "D_SIZE". That is, it is not necessary to specify the number of data itself in other processing. In particular, if the model is changed, the number of data specified in the state setting table 202h may change. Even in such a case, if the label "D_SIZE" is defined as the number of data, the number of data is rewritten in each process using the number of data in the state setting table 202h when the program is diverted to another model. No need. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a mistake in typing the program when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the mistake in the program.

Further, in the present embodiment, the label "D_SIZE" indicating the number of data is not defined by the direct value of the number of data, but is defined by using the label "TBL1". As a result, it is not necessary to rewrite the definition of "D_SIZE" even when the program is diverted to another model having a different number of data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning because it is possible to prevent a mistake in rewriting the definition of "D_SIZE" when the program is diverted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, "TBL1" is defined as a label only at the start address of the state setting table 202h, but for each offset value (for each series of data continuously read in one process). , It may be configured to define a separate label for the start address. For example, the label "TBL2" is associated with the start address (1ADCH) of the data corresponding to the offset value 01H, and the label "TBL3" is associated with the start address (1AE0H) of the data corresponding to the offset value 02H. May be good. Further, in this case, the definition of "D_SIZE" may be defined by the difference between "TBL2" and "TBL1", or may be defined by the difference between "TBL3" and "TBL2". Further, it may be defined as a value obtained by dividing the difference between "TBL3" and "TBL1" by 2.

Further, the name of each label ("TBL1", "D_SIZE", etc.) is not limited to the name of the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. This is because the label name does not affect the operation of the actual machine. More specifically, in the process of translating (assembling) the created program into a language (machine language) that MPU201 can understand, all the labels that appear in each process are converted into the values of the address and the number of data itself. .. That is, at the stage when the program is reflected on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, all the various labels are replaced with hexadecimal machine language. Therefore, the name of the label does not affect the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at all.

Further, the program description method for defining the address and the number of data in association with the label is not limited to the state setting table 202h, and may be referred to in other processing such as the game result setting table 202g. The same description method may be followed for all data tables.

Next, the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. The clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot is a table stored in the range of the addresses "1205H" to "1212H" of the ROM 202, and the addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15) are defined for each address. There is. The details will be described later, but in the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), which is one of the jackpot end processes, the data stored in the order of the addresses from the jackpot end clear table 202i to the ROM 202 is stored by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. "00H" (initial value data) is set as a set value at the address indicated by the read and read stored data (address data). If the data read from the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot is "00H", the zero setting process is terminated. Since only the setting destination address is specified in the jackpot end clear table 202i and the process of setting "00H" to the setting destination address is specified in the control program of MPU201, the jackpot end clear table 202i is specified. The amount of data can be reduced.

Next, various set value storage areas 203e provided in the RAM 203 will be described. FIG. 15 is a schematic view schematically showing the various set value storage areas 203e. As shown in FIG. 15, the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15) correspond to the range of the addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. In the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15), the firing control signal setting value storage area assigned to the address “F000H” of the RAM 203 is a storage in which the setting values for controlling the firing of the sphere are stored. It is an area, and the firing of the ball into the game area is controlled based on the set value stored in this area.

The display LED setting area assigned to the address "F009H" of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which the setting value of the lighting pattern for lighting the display LED is stored, and is based on the setting value stored in this area. And turn on the display LED.

The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2 assigned to the addresses "F01DH" and "F01EH", respectively, are storage areas for storing setting values for outputting various test signals. Examples of the test signal include a signal for performing an operation test of the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a, a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit, and the like. Since it is a test signal, the signal is not output while the player is playing the game on the pachinko machine 10 (that is, "00H" is set as a set value in both the test signal setting areas 1 and 2).

The maximum number of rounds setting area assigned to the address "F030H" is an area for setting the number of jackpot rounds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all jackpots are jackpots with 8 rounds, so if the jackpot is won, "08H" is set as a set value.

The game state setting area assigned to the address "F035H" of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which a setting value indicating the current game state is stored. For example, if the stored setting value is "01H". , The special symbol is changing, if it is "02H", it indicates that the special symbol is being confirmed, and if it is "03H", it is a big hit and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed. It indicates that it is in a state, and if it is "04H", it indicates that the jackpot is in progress and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is in the open state. If it is "00H", the state other than the above (that is, the state from the end of the jackpot to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, or the state where there is no reserved ball, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. (A state in which a certain period of time has passed since then) is shown.

The jackpot flag assigned to the address "F090H" is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot state (special game state) is currently in progress, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is "01H"). If (if), it indicates that the special symbol is in the jackpot, and if it is off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), it is in a state other than the special symbol's jackpot (that is, the special symbol). (Fluctuating state, demo state, etc.). The storage area allocated to the subsequent addresses "F091H" to "F094H" is an area for setting the data read from the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202.

First, the probability change state flag assigned to the address "F091H" is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is currently undergoing probability change, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is "01H"". If (if), it indicates that the special symbol is in the probabilistic change, and if it is off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. ..

Further, the time saving state flag assigned to the address "F092H" indicates whether or not the time saving of the normal symbol is in progress, and is a set value for designating a table for selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation. Is stored. If the flag is "00H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and if the flag is "01H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the time saving state 1.

The time-saving state counter assigned to the address "F093H" shifts to the low-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and when the time-saving state of the normal symbol shifts, the number of time-saving times of the normal symbol remains. It is a counter that indicates whether or not it is. If the game shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time saving state counter is 0 regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol. be. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the probability change state flag is on or the value of the time reduction state counter is 1 or more, the control of the time reduction state of the normal symbol is executed.

The variation selection state counter assigned to the address "F094H" is a counter indicating the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the table for selecting the variation pattern effect is switched to another table. If this counter is 1 or more, a dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table after the end of the jackpot is selected as a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation. On the other hand, when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter is 0, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the table corresponding to the game state indicated by the time saving state flag.

The offset value storage area assigned to the address "F095H" is a storage area for storing the offset value, and the set value after the end of the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202h based on the stored offset value. , The addresses of the RAM 203 are set to "F091H" to "F094H", respectively. This offset value is read from the game result setting table 202g and stored in the offset value storage area when it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery. Further, in the reading of the set value from the state setting table 202h and the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) executed after the setting is completed, the initial value "00H" is overwritten.

The large opening setting area assigned to the address "F096H" is a storage area in which a set value indicating an opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a during the big hit is stored, and is stored during the big hit (that is, that is). Referenced (when the jackpot flag is on). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all jackpot types are jackpots of 8 rounds, and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is common, so a common setting value is set.

The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address "F097H" is an area for setting information on the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a stop symbol code indicating the stop symbol corresponding to the omission is set, and if the lottery result is a win, the stop symbol code according to the jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e. It is issued and set. Then, at the end of the change of the special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the set value set in the stop symbol code information storage area is confirmed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

The addresses "F09FH" to "F0FFH" are unused areas, and the data stored in these areas is fixed to "00H". In the various setting value storage areas 203e, various setting values are assigned to addresses other than those described above. Although the explanation is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter that counts the number of balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and the time for switching the display of the ordinary symbol in the fluctuation production of the ordinary symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to intensively store various setting values, counters, timers, etc. in the various setting value storage areas 203e in which the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. A ring buffer for storing commands to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like (for example, a fluctuation pattern command, a stop type command, etc.), a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball number storage area 203b, a stack area. For example, the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is configured to be stored in an address other than "F0H" (for example, an address in which the upper byte is "F1H").

Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The register 210 is for temporarily storing the address data and the set value data and performing arithmetic processing on the stored set value when reading data from the ROM 202 or the RAM 203 or writing the set value to the RAM 203. Is. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of executing arithmetic processing on the stored data and a general-purpose register 210b1,210b2,210c1,210c2,210d1,210d2 capable of storing address data and setting value data. A flag register 210e for storing various flags and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e as a fixed value are provided. The accumulator 210a can also be used to temporarily store data in the same manner as the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2.

Each register provided in the register 210 is configured to be able to hold 1 byte of data. Further, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2, the general-purpose register 210c1 and the general-purpose register 210c2, and the general-purpose register 210d1 and the general-purpose register 210d2 can be used as a pair, respectively. That is, it is configured so that a total of 2 bytes of data can be stored in the registers of each pair. The data for 2 bytes corresponds to, for example, the address data of the ROM 202, the address data of the RAM 203, and the like.

The flag register 210e is provided with a different flag for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flags are, for example, the zero flag that turns off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero and turns on if it is zero, and the data stored in any of the various general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. If the data is other than "00H", the load flag is turned off, and if the data is "00H", the load flag is turned on.

The control when reading and writing data will be described below. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various commands for executing various controls of the main control device 110, and data reading / writing can also be performed by issuing one of the various commands. Performed using. Specifically, for example, a transfer instruction for designating a read source and a setting destination and transferring the data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination is prepared.

In this transfer instruction, at least one of the read source and the setting destination needs to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or one of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose register 210b1 to general-purpose register 210d2). be. Therefore, for example, when reading the data specified in the address "1ADAH" of the ROM 202 and storing the read data in the address "F093H" of the RAM 203, it is necessary to transfer the data via, for example, the general-purpose register 210b1. Specifically, first, the address "1ADAH" is read from, the general-purpose register 210b1 is set as the setting destination, and the data defined at the address "1ADAH" is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 by using a transfer instruction. Then, next, the general-purpose register 210b1 is set as the read source, the address "F093H" is set as the setting destination, and the transfer instruction is issued again to set the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to the address "F093H". By controlling in this way, the data defined in the address "1ADAH" of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address "F093H" of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a that defines a plurality of modes of variation pattern effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received, the mode of the corresponding variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. Further, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start prize is won in the main control device 110, from each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired according to the start prize. , Various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b, or in the main control device 110, it is special. When the fluctuation display in the symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the set stop type is used for display. The stop type command notifies the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and so on. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being too late.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 64b is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 43).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 18, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to be used as the power-on main image shown in FIG. 18A. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 18 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 17 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64a or the second entrance ball 64b is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C alternate. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. 19 and 20 are explanatory views for explaining the three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 19A is shown in FIG. 19 (b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 20 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. They are shown below.

Of the back surfaces A to C, as shown in FIG. 19, the rear image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B is a character whose image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "city stage" or the "empty stage", the MPU 231 initially positions the display area between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, the rear image on the back surface C has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 20 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (a), an orange sky indicating a sunrise is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 20 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of. Further, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b) excluding FIG. 20 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes the resident video RAM 235 very much. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'or the range of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b). It is fixed, and the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. Can be displayed while. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to 20 (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, FIG. 20 (a). ) To (b) are set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to (c) and 20 (c) to (a) is normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to (c) and 20 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

On the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 controls the voice lamp. When the character symbol is changed based on the content of the command received from the device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read from the character ROM 234, but the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. Is read, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the demo production is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is one of the big hits. If there is, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop.

The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started, and as described above, the demo effect starts even after a predetermined time has passed since the one variable effect stopped. This is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect accompanying the winning is not started, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped. As it is displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect and one display data table corresponding to the demo effect are stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. Similarly, in the pseudo-variation data table, which is a display data table for the effect during the jackpot state, a number of tables corresponding to the set variation effect pattern are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 22).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, in the example of FIG. 21). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 43) (see S2405 in FIG. 43). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 53 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2701 in FIG. 45B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) see S2709) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 46 to 49) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 53 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 53 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing the image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 45 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 50) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 starts an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 50). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3513 in FIG. 54). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 54). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 55).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 55).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 38. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (249 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C3 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per random number counter C3 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 249, 199, 199, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, CS1 and C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64a or the second entry 64b (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, a jackpot determination process is executed in which a lottery is performed based on the data shifted to the execution area to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot (S208). The jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 (according to the fluctuation pattern command). If this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the jackpot setting process (S308), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, or the missed time setting process (S309), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S211: Yes), the start of the jackpot according to the jackpot type is set (S212).

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various set value storage areas 203e is 1 or more (S213). If the value of the time saving state counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving state counter is subtracted by 1 (S214), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving state counter is 0 (S213: No), the processing of S214 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process (S208). This jackpot determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, the lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the fluctuations performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the effect.

In the jackpot determination process, first, the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability is selected from the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot. It is set as a table to be used (S301). After that, the probability change state flag stored in the various set value storage areas 203e is read out (S302), and it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag is in a state indicating a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

As a result of the processing of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S303: Yes), the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 is used to display the first random number table 202a2 for high probability. As a table for reading (not shown) and determining whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol, a new setting is made instead of the first random number table 202a1 for low probability (S304), and the process proceeds to S305. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high probability state (that is, the special symbol is in the low probability state) as a result of the processing of S303 (S303: No), the processing of S304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S305. do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first random number counter C1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), and the read value of the first random number counter C1 and S
Compare with the table (comparison source table) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit set in the process of 301 or S304 (S306).

As described above, in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability, three random numbers "7,107,240" are set as big hits of special symbols. In the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, as random number values that are big hits of special symbols, "4,11,15,28,38,45,52,64,78,83, 30 pieces of "90,99,106,110,112,122,134,140,151,160,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,238,249" are set. In the process of S306, among these tables, the random number value defined in the table set as the comparison source table and the value of the random number counter C1 per first are compared one by one.

Based on this comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any of the random number values specified in the comparison source table (S307), and the matching random number value is determined. If there is (that is, in the case of a big hit of a special symbol), the big hit setting process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit and the control during the big hit is executed (S308), and the process shifts to the process of S310. do. On the other hand, when there is no matching random number value in the processing of S307 (that is, in the case of deviation of the special symbol), the deviation time setting processing for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is executed (S309). The process proceeds to S310. The details of the jackpot setting process (S308) and the loss setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29.

Next, in the process of S310, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process is terminated. Since various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even in the case of a big hit, it is possible to clear the random value (counter value) that becomes the big hit before the big hit state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside. It can be suppressed. Specifically, the analysis timing is set on the so-called hanging board, the random number is acquired at the timing when the random number value that becomes the jackpot appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling so as to judge the success or failure of the jackpot is suppressed. Can be done. In the present embodiment, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is in a jackpot state. It should be cleared before it is recognized that. Therefore, for example, a process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during the fluctuation effect or before the symbol is stopped.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state, the first random number table for the low probability time is temporarily set in the processing of S301 at an early stage. This is to set up a table for comparison. That is, when none of the first random number tables (first random number table 202a1 for low probability or first random number table 202a2 for high probability) is set, the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a problem that the processing of S303 or S304, which is the processing in the middle, is skipped due to the above, the big hit is based on the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability time set at the beginning of the big hit judgment processing. Whether it is right or wrong can be determined.

Next, the jackpot setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As described above, this jackpot setting process is a process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot.

In this process, first, the jackpot flag of the various setting value storage areas 203e is set to on (S401), and then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot of the jackpot won this time is read. The type is specified (S402). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is specified based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B). For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80", the counter value is in the range of "0" to "99", so the jackpot type this time is specified as jackpot A (time saving jackpot). .. Further, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "190", the counter value is in the range of "180" to "194", so the jackpot type this time is jackpot C (latent probability variation jackpot). Be identified.

Next, the set value corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202h of the ROM 202, and the read set value is set in the corresponding storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 (S403). The process proceeds to S404. Here, as the setting values to be read from the game result setting table 202h and set in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the lighting pattern of the LED 37a (the number of displayed symbols), the information indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol (stop symbol code), and the like. , The control pattern (large opening pattern) of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the like can be mentioned.

As described above, when the set value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the data of the transfer source address and the data of the set destination address are stored in one of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Temporarily store. Then, the set value data read from the ROM 202 based on the stored transfer source address data is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers in which the address data is not stored, and then the set destination address. The set value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data of. In the process of S403, the transfer control via the register 210 is repeated for the number of set value data to be transferred.

In the processing of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random number value (counter value), and in the processing of S403, various set values are determined based on the specified jackpot type, but the range of the random number value (counter value) And various set values may be directly associated with each other and specified. That is, a table in which the range of the random number value (counter value) and the corresponding various setting values are defined may be provided in the ROM 202, and the setting value may be directly specified from the random number value by referring to this table. ..

In the process of S404, the variation type data is selected by reading the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and comparing it with the hit selection table 202d1 of the variation type selection table 202d (S404). For example, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "10", "01H", which is a value corresponding to the winning long reach, is selected as the fluctuation type data. If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "190", "02H", which is a value corresponding to the winning super reach, is selected as the fluctuation type data.

Next, the pattern selection offset value is determined by comparing the selected variation type data with the offset setting table 202e (S405). Specifically, if the selected variation type data is "00H", "00H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value, and if the variation type data is "01H", "01H" is the pattern selection offset value. If the variation type data is "02H", "02H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value.

Then, based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the fluctuation pattern type is specified from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type defined in the address 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, by the amount of the pattern selection offset value is specified as the variation pattern type in the current symbol variation. do. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is "01H", the "hit long reach" defined in 1A6FH, which is the address 1A6FH ahead of the address 1AF5H by "01H", is specified as the current variation type.

Then, the variation pattern command based on the specified variation pattern type is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S407). The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201.

After setting the fluctuation pattern, at the end of the jackpot, the game result setting value acquisition process, which is the process for acquiring and setting the offset information, which is the information for setting the game state after the jackpot ends, is executed (S408). , End this process.

Subsequently, the game result set value acquisition process (S408) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The game result set value acquisition process (S408) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a process for holding the offset value based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the RAM 203.

In the game result setting value acquisition process (S408), first, the offset value based on the current jackpot type is read out from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12B) (S501). For example, if the jackpot type this time is jackpot C, "02H" is read as an offset value. Then, the read offset value is stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e (S502), and this process is terminated.

The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e in the process of S502 is held until the end timing of the jackpot, and is a process for setting the state after the end of the jackpot (FIG. 37). (See), it is used to determine the data to be read from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). In this way, the random value (counter value) acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b (starting winning) is converted into an offset value and the offset value storage area. Since it is configured to store in and set the game state after the jackpot ends based on the offset value, the period in which the random number value itself, which is the jackpot of the special symbol, is held is limited to a short period of time. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random value, which is the jackpot of the special symbol, from being illegally obtained from the outside.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, in the jackpot determination process (S208), when it is determined that the lottery result is out of the special symbol, the deviation pattern setting process is executed to set the mode of the variation pattern. (S309) will be described.

In the off-set setting process, first, the special drawing 1 deviation selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 9A) or the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3 (FIG. 9B) defined in the variation type selection table 202d. (See), the table corresponding to the entry port where the ball has entered is read out, and the variation type data value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S601). Here, the table corresponding to the entry port into which the ball has entered is the selection table 202d2 for removing the special figure 1 if the entry port into which the ball has entered is the first entry port 64a (FIG. 9 (a). ), And if the entry port into which the ball has entered is the second entry opening 64b, the selection table 202d3 for removing special drawing 2 (see FIG. 9B).

After the processing of S601 is completed, the pattern selection offset value is set to the offset setting table 202e based on the selected variable type data value and the current number of reserved balls (that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c). (See FIG. 10) to select from (S602). For example, if the value of the variation type data is "03H" and the number of reserved balls is "2", "05H" is selected as the pattern selection offset value. If the value of the variation type data is "09H", "12H" is selected as the pattern selection offset value regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Then, based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the fluctuation pattern type is specified from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type defined in the address 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, by the amount of the pattern selection offset value is specified as the variation pattern type in the current symbol variation. do. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is "05H", the "complete deviation C (special figure 1)" specified in the address 1AFAH, which is "05H" ahead of the address 1AF5H, is selected. That is, the mode of deviation in which the reach of the fluctuation time of 6 seconds does not occur is determined as the fluctuation pattern type. Further, for example, if the pattern selection offset value is "12H", the "off long reach (special figure 2)" defined in the address 1B07H, which is "12H" ahead of the address 1AF5H, is selected. That is, the mode of deviation accompanied by the reach of the fluctuation time of 17 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern type.

Next, the variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern type is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S604), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b. , This is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various random number counters when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding of the variation display in the special symbol). The number of times N) is acquired (S702), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

Then, there is no prize in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b (S701: No), or there is a prize in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b. If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64a or the second ball slot 64b (S701: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added by 1 (S704). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S705).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S705, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is changed. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S706, the winning / failing of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not) in the special symbol, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S707). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depends on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S606 and the random number value (hit value) stored in the first random number table 202a. Judgment is made by comparing one. As described above, the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol at the low probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability of the special symbol, 3 of "7,107,240". The random number value, which is an individual number and is a big hit of the special symbol at the time of high probability, is stored in the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability, "4,11,15,28,38,45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231,238, 249 "30" It is an individual.

Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation state flags stored in the various set value storage areas 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation state flag is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation state flag is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the processing of S707, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation state flag, and when these values match, it is special. Judge that it is a big hit of the symbol.

Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S706 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table. It is determined which of the four types of special symbol jackpots (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is the jackpot type. As described above, the jackpot type is specified by comparing the value of the first hit type counter C2 with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is completely out of alignment based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the process of S706. It is determined whether there is a short reach, a long reach, or a super reach. As described above, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of deviation is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) by converting the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 into a pattern selection offset value and based on the pattern selection offset value. ..

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S707, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and the predicted stopping type are determined. A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S708), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24).

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is performed. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S804), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S804: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S805).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S808). Specifically, if the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability change state flag is on, it is determined that the time saving state is a normal symbol. ..

In the process of S808, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S808: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S809). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S809: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, it is difficult to hit the normal symbol. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the second entering opening 64b is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 64b as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64a, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entry opening 64b during the jackpot of the special symbol, but the first entry. Many balls enter the ball mouth 64a. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64a becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S809, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S809: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C3 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S810). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C3 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 7 (c)).

In the process of S808, if it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S808: No), the process proceeds to the process of S811. In the processing of S811, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C3 acquired in the processing of S807 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S811). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C3 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 7 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S810 or S811 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S812), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S812: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S813). In the process of S813, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S814), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S814: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot. Is determined (S815). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S815: Yes), the process proceeds to S817. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 64b as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S815, unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S815: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64b is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S816), and the process proceeds to S819. If it is determined in the process of S814 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S814: No), the process proceeds to the process of S817. In the processing of S817, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S817), and shift to the process of S819.

In the process of S812, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S812: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S818). In the process of S818, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S819.

In the process of S819, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S819), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S819: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S820), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S819: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state). S821), this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball enters the second entry port 64b. It will be in an easy state.

In the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S822). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S820 or the process of S821 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S822, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S822: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S822, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S822: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823). In the process of S823, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S813, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S818, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S823, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S813 or the process of S818.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S824). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S824: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is set (S825), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is controlled. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S824, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S824: No), the process of S825 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the first This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C3 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S903).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is added by 1 (S904). Then, the value of the second random number counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S905), and this process is terminated. In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1001) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process shifts to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if it is not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S1112 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1112 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1214 of FIG. 35, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1112, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1104: No). S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1110, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1201 to S1206 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1209 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1201). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1204), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed and the specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65 is executed. (Large opening port) A jackpot control process for opening or closing 65a is executed (S1203). Here, the jackpot state of the special symbol specifically determines that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern production that becomes the jackpot has elapsed, and after the start of the jackpot is set, the end of the set jackpot is determined. Refers to the period until setting. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1203) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the second entry port 64b is executed (S1204). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S816 or the processing of S817 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1205). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S407 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S604 of the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29), the variation pattern is set. The variable display according to the above is started in the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S407 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S604 of the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29). When is finished, the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is finished, and the processing of S406 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) or S603 of the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29) is completed. The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S820 or the process of S821 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 31), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S823 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S813 or the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 31) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1208: Yes), the process is shifted to S1201, and each process after S1201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1208: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (249, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C3) can be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1207, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1210 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1210), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1211). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1212), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area to be backed up and the work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1207 is executed at the timing when a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1201 to S1206 ends, or at the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1209 performed within the remaining time ends. There is. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1201 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1203). This jackpot control process (S1203) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1301). Specifically, if the processing of S212 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1301, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1301: Yes), the opening command is set (S1302), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1301: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1303). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1303, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1303: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1303, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1303: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1304). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1304: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1305), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1306). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1304: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307). Specifically, 10 balls are formed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. If a prize is won, it is determined that the closing conditions have been met.

In the process of S1307, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1308), and this processing is completed. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1307: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S1309).

In the process of S1309, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1309: Yes), the setting value corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot is set and the setting value for the jackpot is reset. (S1310), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set, and this process is terminated. Although the details will be described later, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 37), the jackpot flag is initialized together with other set values (“00H” is set). Therefore, even if the power of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, only the jackpot flag is turned off, and other set values can be suppressed from being left at the jackpot setting.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an ending effect is set for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot after the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied in the final round of the jackpot. NS. In the process of S1309, when it is determined that the end timing of the set ending effect (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has elapsed), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot.

The end timing of the jackpot is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the final round of the jackpot, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied, it may be configured to shift to the jackpot end processing (S1310) as the end timing of the jackpot. ..

Next, the jackpot end process (S1310) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. As described above, this jackpot end process (S1310) is a process for setting a set value corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot and resetting the set value for the jackpot.

In this jackpot end process (S1310), first, the state setting table 202h is read from the ROM 202 (S1401). The term "read" as used herein means that the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D8H) of the start address (1AD8H) of the state setting table 202h are used as address data in any pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose registers). It means that it is stored in 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2).

Next, in the game result setting value acquisition process (see FIG. 28) executed before the start of this jackpot, the game result setting value acquisition process (see FIG. 28) was stored in advance in the offset value storage area of various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15). The offset value is stored in the accumulator 210a.

Next, an arithmetic process is performed in which the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a is multiplied by the number of data "D_SIZE" (S1403). As described above, "D_SIZE" indicates the number of data types corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). In the present embodiment, four types of setting values of a special symbol lottery state, a normal symbol state, a time saving number of times, and a variable pattern selection mode switching number are defined in the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, the numerical value corresponding to the number of data "D_SIZE" is "0004H".

As shown in parentheses in FIG. 13A, in the state setting table 202h, the lottery state of the special symbol corresponding to the offset value 00H, the state of the normal symbol, the number of time reductions, and the variation pattern selection from the side with the smaller address value. Mode switching count, special symbol lottery status corresponding to offset 01H, normal symbol status, time reduction count, variable pattern selection mode switching count, special symbol lottery status corresponding to offset 02H, normal symbol status, time reduction count, fluctuation Data is stored in the order of the number of times the pattern selection mode is switched. That is, every time the address value increases by four, the set value corresponding to the offset value larger by 1 is stored. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 is the difference (offset) between the start address of the state setting table 202h and the data storage address corresponding to the current offset value. In the process of S1403, the difference (offset) of the addresses with respect to the start address of the state setting table 202h is obtained.

When the processing of S1403 is completed, the difference between the address value set in the pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose register 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2) in the processing of S1401 with respect to the start address of the state setting table 202h calculated in the processing of S1402. (Offset) is added, and the added address is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1404).

Next, the address in which the probability change state flags of the various setting value storage areas 203e are stored is set as the setting destination address (S1405), and the data stored in the transfer source address set in the processing of S1404 at the setting destination address. Is transferred (S1406).

After that, it is determined whether or not all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407), and the transfer has not been completed (that is, the untransferred data type is If it is determined (S1407: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data specified in the added address is read (S1408), and 1 is added to the set destination address. The data is added and the data read in the process of S1408 is stored in the added address (S1409). Then, the process returns to S1407, and it is determined whether or not all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407). That is, the processes of S1407 to S1409 are repeated until all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h are transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, if it is determined that all four types of data specified in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407: Yes), the data is set to the various setting value storage areas 203e. A status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status is set (S1410), processing for clearing the set value of the jackpot (S1411, S1412) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

In the process of clearing the jackpot setting value, the address immediately before the start address of the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot of ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1411). , The zero setting process for initializing by setting 0 to the address where the set value during the jackpot in the various set value storage areas 203e is set is executed (S1412).

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 38, the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This zero setting process (see FIG. 38) is a process of initializing the various set value storage areas 203e by overwriting 0 with respect to the various set values set for controlling the jackpot.

In the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address to set a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501).

Next, in the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14), the address data stored in the address set as the transfer source (read source) address is read, and the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the read address data is read. Is set as the setting destination address (S1502).

After the processing of S1502, in the processing of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (reading source) address is "00H" (S1503), and it is determined that the read data is "00H". If so (S1503: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1503: No), "00H" is overwritten on the address of the RAM 203 set as the setting destination address (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

After that, the processes of S1501 to S1504 are repeated until "00H" is read from the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot. In the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 14), "00H" is stored only in the address at the end, and "00H" is not stored in the address other than the end, so it is specified other than the end. The processes of S1501 to S1504 are repeated until "00H" is stored in all the addresses corresponding to the address data.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), the number of times of setting "00H" as data in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. , It was determined that "00H" was read as data from the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot, without configuring the process to end when it was determined that the data setting for the set number of times was completed. It is configured to end the process in some cases.

If the number of settings is described in the control program, the designer of the control program newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diverting the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake in counting, the control program specifies the wrong number of repetitions, so the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. This may not be possible and the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is only necessary to specify "00H" as data at the end of the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot, the designer at the time of designing the control program. Can reduce the possibility of making mistakes. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

The end condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) is the case where "00H" is read out as data in the lower byte of the address in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15). The address where is "00H" (that is, the address "F000H") is an area for storing the set value related to the launch of the ball, and the address whose set value is not changed before and after the end of the jackpot (initialization is required at the end of the jackpot). Because it is an address that does not Since it is an address that does not require initialization at the end of the jackpot, it is not necessary to specify it as the address to be initialized in the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 14), and the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 14). There is no possibility that it will appear except at the end of). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the process from being read out as data before the initialization of all the set values is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing (see S1716 in FIG. 30) is due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1713 in FIG. 40), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1716. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1716 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1716. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1716 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the data shifts to S1608.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1606). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1611) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1608 is performed via the processes of S1604 to S1606. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1609 is skipped when the processing of S1608 is reached via the processing of S1604 to S1606, the processing of S1604 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223, noise, etc. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset and the start-up process is started, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 is continued by saving the data in the work area of the RAM 223 without clearing it. Because it can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1701 this time was executed (S1701), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1710. In the process of S1701, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1702 to S1710 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1711 and the variation display setting process of S1712 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1707). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1707 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1709, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1710), and the process proceeds to the process of S1711. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1709 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1711, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1711). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the variation display setting process (S1712) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off process is executed (S1716). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1717), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to the process of S1701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1804). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). Further, in the process of S1808, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1808 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1808 every time the start winning prize is detected or the special symbol lottery is performed. It is adjusted to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of 110. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected. Or, at the time of lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S1807: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1809). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1810). After the processing of S1810 is completed, next, the winning information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1810 is the first of the empty areas (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Stored in the area (S1811),
Return to main processing.

In the process of S1809, if the winning information command is not received (S1809: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1812). Then, when the round number command is received (S1812: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1813), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1812: Yes). S1814), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1812, if the number of rounds command is not received (S1812: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1812: No). S1819), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1903).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1806 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the display control device is based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 55. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 43, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2401) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2502, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2502, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2401 in FIG. 43) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) (S2505), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2401) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2502. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2501. , And, after repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2502, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2403, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2404). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2405). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 53 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3702 in FIG. 53 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn. The determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. This can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while it is displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second entry ball port 64b (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect is given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation effect of the power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c) is displayed. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing this command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2702) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2703) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49.

In the display setting process (S2703), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2704). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2703) or the simple display setting process (S2709). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), which are determined in the task process (S2704), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, front / rear out reach, front / back out, etc. The stop type table corresponding to either reach or complete deviation) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2708) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2709) is executed to display S2704. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2801: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (2801: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2703) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2803).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2804), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2805), the process returns to S2801.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2805) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2901).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901 in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2906), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2905, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2902e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2904, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2804, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2806). If there is a display variable type command (S2806: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2807), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2807) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) is supported. The stop type table is determined (S3001), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S3002).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4002 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S3003), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2704), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3003, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2806, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a display round number command (S2808: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2809) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3105), the round number command process (S2809) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 46).

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2808: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2810), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S2810: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2811) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (a). FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process (S2811). This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process (S2811), first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3703) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on. (S3201). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3202), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3201 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2810, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2810: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2812), and there is an error command. If (S2812: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2813) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3301). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3302). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process (S2703), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3302 is determined, and the error is determined. The process is executed so that the warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3302, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2812 (S2812: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2819), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

In the processing of S2801 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes). ), The processing of S2802 to S2819 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2801 to S2819 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2801 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2708) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 47 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other processes are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2901. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2703), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3401: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S3402 to S3404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3402), S3403 and S3404 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3403). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3404).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3501).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description of FIG. 50 is returned to. After the warning image setting process (S3404) or in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3403: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3405.

In S3405, the pointer update process is executed (S3405). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3601, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3603), and if it is a demo display data table (S3603: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3605), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3603: No). S3606), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3602, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3602: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 50 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3406 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3408: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3409).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3409: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3410), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3411). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by invoking another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2704), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3415, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3409: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3416). If the demo display flag is off (S3416: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3417) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3418). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3416, if the demo display flag is on (S3416: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table in which the display data table (any of FIGS. 18B and 18C) is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, the details of the transfer setting process (S2705) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701). If it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image is not transferred. The transfer setting process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 (b).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off (S3701: No) as a result of the processing of S3701, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident from the character ROM 234. It is transferred to the video RAM 235 for use. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3702), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3801), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3801: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3802). In the process of S3402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3802: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3803. Further, as a result of the processing of S3801, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3803.

In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3803: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3803 (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 45 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 49) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) (see S3701: No in FIG. 53 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3703), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3405) of the display setting process (S2703) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3902), and if it is the transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3903) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905.

Further, in the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3905. In the process of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3906).

In the process of S3906, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3906 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3907. Further, as a result of the processing of S3905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3905: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3907.

In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3908), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3909). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3909: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3909: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3910), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3911). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3912), and the process proceeds to the process of S3913.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The discrimination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3913 (S3913: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3914). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3914, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S4001). That is, in the processing of S4001, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2704). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S4002 (S4003). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. In the first embodiment, in order to read the set value corresponding to the offset value from the state setting table 202h, the label ""TBL1" and "D_SIZE" were associated with each other. That is, the label was used when reading a part of the table and setting it. On the other hand, in this modification, a method of defining a table that needs to be read out as a whole will be described. Examples of the table that needs to be read out collectively include the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c. In this modification, the first random number table 202a will be taken as an example for explanation.

FIG. 56 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability time, and FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability time. It is a figure shown. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. To determine whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability time is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit.

As described above, in the first hit random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 56 (a)) for low probability, three random numbers "7,107,240" are set as big hits of the special symbol. ing. These three random numbers are stored, for example, at the addresses 1A00H, 1A01H, and 1A02H of the ROM 202, respectively.

Further, in the first random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 56 (b)) for high probability, "4,11,15,28,38,45,52,64" is shown as a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol. , 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231,238, 249 " Has been done. These 30 random numbers are stored in the range of addresses 1A03H to 1A20H of ROM 202, for example. That is, the first random number table 202a1 for low probability and the first random number table 202a2 for high probability are continuously defined so that no free address is generated. Details will be described later, but by defining each table continuously, if only the start address of each table is known, it is specified in the table by taking the difference from the start address of the adjacent table. The number of existing data can be easily calculated.

Next, the description contents of each table in the program will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of description contents of the first random number table 202a1 for low probability and the first random number table 202a2 for high probability.

As shown in FIG. 57, first, "TL_TBL" is specified as a label indicating the first random number table 202a1 for low probability, and in the next line, the first random number table 202a for low probability is specified. 07H, 6BH, and F0H are specified as the data to be used. This random number value is specified in order from the address 00H of the ROM 202.

Further, in the line following the line in which the data (random number value) specified in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability is described, as a label indicating the first random number table 202a2 for high probability, " "TH_TBL" is specified.

From the next line where the label "TH_TBL" is specified, 30 random number values specified in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability are specified over 3 lines, 10 per line. There is. Of these three lines, the first line is described to associate 10 random values with each line from addresses 03H to 0CH, and the second line is described with 10 lines with addresses 0DH to 16H. It is described to associate one random number value at a time, and the third line is described to associate 10 random number values one by one with each line of addresses 17H to 20H.

By describing the random number values on a plurality of lines, it is possible for the program creator to easily find the omission of the description of the random number values. That is, if 30 random values are described together in one line, it becomes difficult to determine at a glance how many random values are specified, and it is assumed that some random values are leaked. However, it may be overlooked. On the other hand, in this modified example, the same number of random numbers are described separately on a plurality of lines. Therefore, for example, if the description of the random values is partially omitted only in the second line, the line length becomes longer. Since only the second line is shortened, it is possible to determine at a glance that there is an error in the second line. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress a program description error, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning based on the incorrect description. In this modification, the number of description of the random number value per line is set to 10, but the number is not limited to this, and the number may be set so that the description omission can be easily found. For example, the number of random numbers specified per line may be 6 and the description may be divided into 5 lines, or the number of random values specified per line may be 15 and the description may be divided into 2 lines. ..

In the row next to the row in which the data (random number value) specified in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability time is described, the second random number table 202c (ordinary symbol per random number table) for low probability time is placed. As a label to indicate, "FL_TBL" is defined, and from the next line, a random number value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol at a low probability of the ordinary symbol is described. Although the illustration is omitted, the random value that is a hit of a normal symbol is also described in a plurality of lines with 10 random values as the maximum value per line, like the random value that is a hit of a special symbol. There is.

In the program, the number of random number values constituting each table is defined in a place different from the specified place of each of the above-mentioned tables (first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c). Specifically, "TL_SIZE" is specified as the number of random numbers specified in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability, and further, it is specified in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability. "TH_SIZE" is defined as the number of random numbers. In this way, since the number of random values is defined by associating it with the label, it is necessary for the program creator to directly count the number of random values and specify it numerically in all the processes for reading the random values. No. In particular, when the program is diverted to another model, the number of random numbers may change, but in this modified example, the meanings of the labels "TL_SIZE" and "TH_SIZE" change even if the number changes. Therefore, it is not necessary to rewrite the content of the process of reading the number of random values in each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent omission of rewriting when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in rewriting the program. Further, in this modified example, in the program, the place where each table is described and the place where the number of random values constituting each table are described are described together in one place. By grouping the description points for each type of description content in this way, it is possible to prevent omission of rewriting by the program creator when diverting to another model. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in rewriting the program.

"TL_SIZE" is defined by the difference between the address indicated by the label "TH_TBL" and the address indicated by the label "TL_TBL". Further, "TH_SIZE" is defined by the difference between the address indicated by the label "FL_TBL" and the address indicated by the label "TH_TBL". In this way, if the number of random values specified in each table is defined by the label associated with the start address of each table, the specified position of the table in ROM 202 may change or the disorder specified in the table may change. Even if the number of numbers changes, there is no need to rewrite the label definition. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent omission of rewriting when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in rewriting the program. Further, in this modification, one random number value is stored in one address, and the random number value is defined so that no empty address is generated between the tables. As a result, the range of addresses specified in each table matches the number of random numbers, so the label associated with the start address of each table makes it easy to set the random values specified in each table. Can be calculated. The definition of the label is not limited to the content of this modification, and may be arbitrarily defined so that the program creator can easily understand it.

Next, the control process of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In the special symbol variation processing (S104) of this modification, each processing of S201 to S207 and each processing of S209 to S214 are each processing of S201 to S207 of the special symbol variation processing (S104) in the first embodiment. , And the same processing as each processing of S209 to S214 is executed. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, when the data in the special symbol hold storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area by the processing of S207 (S207), the jackpot determination process 2 is executed (S221), and this processing is terminated. .. The jackpot determination process 2 (S221) has a special symbol based on the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. The details of the jackpot determination process 2 (S221) will be described with reference to the following FIG. 59.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process 2 (S221) in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In each of the jackpot determination processes 2 (S221), S302, S303, S305, and S307 to S310, the same processes as the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when it is determined in the processing of S303 that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S303: Yes), then the address represented by "TH_TBL" (that is, high probability). The first random number table 202a2 for time is set as the comparison source address (S311), and "TH_SIZE" (that is, the number of random numbers specified in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability time). ) Is set as the number of comparisons (S312), and the process shifts to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (S303: No), then the address represented by "TH_TBL" (that is, the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability time). (Starting address of) is set as the comparison source address (S313), and "TL_SIZE" (that is, the number of random number values specified in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability) is set as the number of comparisons (S314). ), The process shifts to S305.

In the process of S305 that shifts after the process of S312 or S314, when the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer is read (S305), then the read first random number counter C1 is read. The value of is compared with the random number value specified in the comparison source address (S315). Then, while advancing the comparison source address by 1, the number of comparisons is subtracted by 1 (S316), and it is determined whether or not the number of comparisons after the subtraction is 0 (S317). If the determination result is 0 (S317: Yes), the process shifts to S307. On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S317 that the number of comparisons is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S317: No), the processing is shifted to S315 again, and S315 to S317 until the number of comparisons becomes 0. Repeat the process. That is, each random number value defined in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability or the first random number table 202a2 for high probability and the value of the first random number counter C1 are set. We will compare each random number value one by one.

In this way, by using the label when reading the table or reading the number of random values specified in the table, when the program is diverted to another model, the jackpot determination process 2 (S208) in the program. Since it is possible to omit the modification of the description content of, it is possible to suppress the modification error of the program. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a mistake in modifying the program.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the variation type data selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. Then, the fluctuation type data is converted into a pattern selection offset value using the offset setting table 202e, and is used for selecting the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. Further, in the offset setting table 202e, even if the fluctuation type data values are the same, if the fluctuation type data values (03H, 05H, 07H) are used, different pattern selection offset values are selected according to the number of reserved balls. It is configured to be done. This makes it possible to change the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern according to the number of reserved balls. More specifically, when a predetermined fluctuation type data value (03H, 05H, 07H) is selected, the fluctuation pattern type having a shorter fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases. There is.

With this configuration, when there are many reserved balls (that is, the fluctuation pattern production is continuous), it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time is long and only the fluctuation pattern production that is out of order as a result is continuous. Can be done. In general, the longer the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern production, the easier it is for the player to have an expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, the longer the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern production, the greater the disappointment of the player. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by configuring the deviation fluctuation of the long fluctuation time to be difficult to continue, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lost.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to select the fluctuation pattern type according to the number of reserved balls, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the fluctuation type data using the offset setting table 202e. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variable type data with the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the variable type counter value is set in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting to an offset value. Therefore, one of the most important processes in the game, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern effect, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the data table of the state setting table 202h and the first random number table 202a is specified in the program, it is specified in a predetermined address such as the start address of the table or in the table. A predetermined name (label) is associated with the number of data types. With this configuration, it is not necessary to directly describe the address value when configuring a program for reading a predetermined address or the number of data in the data table in other processing. In particular, if the model changes, the processing content and the number of data in the data table may change. Therefore, when the program used in this pachinko machine 10 is diverted to another game machine, the address assigned to each data table. The value and the specified data type may also change. Even in such a case, if a predetermined name (label) is associated with the address read by other processing, the predetermined address of the data table and the number of data types can be used when the program is diverted to another model. It is not necessary to re-enter the address of the data table and the number of data types in the description part of the process including the control to read the data. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a mistake in typing the program when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the mistake in the program.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined name (label) is associated with the number of data types specified in the data table and specified, the data table is associated with a predetermined address. It is specified by using the label. As a result, the creator of the program does not need to count the number of types of data specified in the data table and specify the counted numerical value in association with a predetermined name (label). That is, even if the predetermined address and the number of data types are changed due to the diversion of the program or the like, the number of data types is automatically calculated as a value corresponding to the program after diversion using the label. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a mistake in typing the program when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the mistake in the program.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. In the first embodiment described above, even if the value of the fluctuation type data selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same, the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Therefore, in the offset setting table 202e, the pattern selection offset value is specified to be different according to the number of reserved balls. Then, different fluctuation pattern types are selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) according to the pattern selection offset value.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the offset setting table 202e defines that the variation type data and the pattern selection offset value have a one-to-one correspondence relationship. That is, when the same variation type data is selected, the same pattern selection offset value is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Then, in the present embodiment, the data structure of the pattern selection offset value is determined, and if the data structure has a predetermined data structure, the pattern selection offset value is converted to a new offset value. Then, based on the offset value, the variation pattern type is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11). That is, instead of defining the offset value for the number of reserved balls in the offset selection table 202e, the program is configured to determine whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of reserved balls. As a result, the data capacity of the offset setting table 202e can be reduced as compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the above-mentioned "predetermined data structure" is performed is determined by whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1. Then, when it is determined that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1, the program executes a conversion of adding the number of reserved balls to the value with the most significant bit set to 0.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the offset setting table 202e of the ROM 202 are partially changed in the main controller 110. And a part of the processing included in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an offset setting table 202e according to the present embodiment. In the offset setting table 202e in the first embodiment, when the variation type data values are "03H", "05H", and "07H", different pattern selection offset values are selected according to the number of reserved balls. However, in the present embodiment, the variation type data value and the pattern selection offset value are configured to have a one-to-one correspondence relationship.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, when the fluctuation type data values are “00H” to “02H”, “04H”, “06H”, “08H” to “09H”, they are used as pattern selection offset values, respectively. The same values as those in the first embodiment are associated and defined. That is, for each of the above variation type data, as pattern selection offset values, "00H (binary notation 00000000000B)" to "02H (binary notation 0000000010B)", "07H (binary notation 00000011B)", "0CH (binary notation 000001100B)", "11H (binary notation 00010001B)" to "13H (binary notation 00010011B)" are associated with each other. In other words, the pattern selection offset values corresponding to the above-mentioned variable type data are all data in which the most significant bit is "0".

On the other hand, the pattern selection offset value associated with the variation type data value "03H" is "83H (binary notation 10000011B)", and the pattern associated with the variation type data value "05H". The selection offset value is "88H (10001000B in binary notation)", and the pattern selection offset value associated with the variation type data value "07H" is "8DH (10001000B in binary notation)". That is, the pattern offset values corresponding to the fluctuation type data "03H", "05H", and "07H" (that is, the fluctuation type data in which the fluctuation pattern type selected according to the number of reserved balls is different) are all the most significant bits. Is the data of "1".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1" in the disconnection setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) described later, and the variation pattern selection table is used. It is configured to calculate an offset value for specifying the fluctuation pattern type from 202f (see FIG. 11). That is, if the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1", the data "1" stored in the most significant bit is cleared, and a numerical value corresponding to the number of reserved balls is added (pattern selection offset). It is configured to convert the value to a value according to the number of reserved balls). Since it is not necessary to specify the data for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, the amount of data in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. Further, in the determination of whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of reserved balls, "1" is set as data in the most significant bit (empty bit) of the pattern selection offset value, which was not used in the first embodiment. It depends on whether it is stored or not. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of reserved balls without increasing the number of bits of the pattern selection offset value.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to store information corresponding to an offset value for selecting a fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in the lower bits of each pattern selection offset (upper bit). Does not store information corresponding to the offset), so it is possible to determine whether or not to perform conversion according to the number of reserved balls by using the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of reserved balls depending on whether or not "1" is stored as data in the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be stored in the sixth bit or the like.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main control device 110, and as described above, the special symbol hold ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81.

In each of the jackpot determination processes (S208), S301 to S308 and S310, the same processes as those of S301 to S308 and S310 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are performed. Will be executed. Then, in the jackpot determination process in the second embodiment, the loss time setting process 2 (S311) is executed instead of the loss time setting process (S309) in the first embodiment. That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the second embodiment, in the process of S307, it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 does not match any random number value defined in the comparison source table. In the case (S307: No), the disconnection setting process 2 is executed (S311), and the process shifts to S310. This out-of-order setting process 2 is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, similar to the out-of-off setting process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the above-mentioned off-set setting process 2 (S311) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the setting process 2 (S311) at the time of disconnection. This out-of-order setting process 2 (S311) is a process executed in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 61) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and as described above, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment. This is a process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern.

In each of the out-of-order setting processes 2 (S311), S601 and S604, the same processes as those in S601 and S604 of the out-of-order setting process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed, respectively. Will be done. Then, in the offset setting process 2 (S311) in the second embodiment, when the variable type data is selected from the variable type selection table 202d based on the value of the variable type counter CS1 in the process of S601 (S601), then, the variable type data is selected (S601). Based on the selected variation type data, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the offset setting table 202e (S611), and it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the determined pattern selection offset value is "1" (S612). .. Then, when it is determined that the most significant bit is "1" (S612: Yes), the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is cleared to "0", and then the pattern selection offset value of the current reserved ball is set. The number (that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c) is added and set as a new offset value (S613), and the process shifts to S615.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S612 that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is not "1" (that is, "0") (S612: No), the pattern selection offset value determined in the processing of S611 is determined. Is set as an offset value as it is (S614), and the process shifts to S615. In the processing of S615, the variation pattern type specified in the destination address of 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, by the offset value set in the processing of S613 or S614 is executed this time. It is selected as the variable pattern type of the pattern effect (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the processing shifts to S604.

In this way, in the processing of S612, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1", and if the most significant bit is "1", it is converted into a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls. By configuring in this way, the number of data specified in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is defined to be "1" in the fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is different according to the number of reserved balls. There is. Further, when the variation pattern type is selected based on the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e, the number of reserved balls is set based on whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1". It is configured to determine whether or not to convert to the corresponding value. With this configuration, it is not necessary to specify the pattern selection offset values for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, so that the amount of data specified in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the increase in the capacity of the ROM 202, the production cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variable type data with the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the variable type counter value is set in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting to an offset value. Therefore, one of the most important processes in the game, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern effect, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 79. In the second embodiment described above, the jackpot, the deviation when the ball enters the first entry port 64a, and the deviation when the ball enters the second entry port 64b are obtained from the variation pattern selection table 202f. It was configured so that the variation pattern type was selected. Further, in some deviations, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same, the fluctuation pattern effect of a different mode is set according to the number of reserved balls.

In addition to this, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that different variable pattern types are selected based on the previous jackpot type (type of the first symbol) and the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot. Has been done. As a result, the variation of the variable pattern effect can be diversified, and it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is notified based on the effect content executed in a predetermined period after the jackpot ends. It is configured as follows. Specifically, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery 10 times, the display image is ranked up in the third symbol display device 81, and the rank is the maximum. When becomes, it is notified that the state has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol. More specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect of growing the plant displayed on the screen was performed, and when the plant grew completely and the flower bloomed, the state shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol. Is configured to be notified (see FIGS. 71 to 75). By executing the rank-up effect for a predetermined period of time in this way, it is possible to make the player happy and disappointed with the result of each effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that in the main control device 110, the first type selection table 202b, the variable type selection table 202d, and the offset of the ROM 202 are used. The contents of the setting table 202e and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f have been partially changed, and the selection table 202j at the time of disconnection has been newly added. Is added, the rank information storage area 223e is added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and one included in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The partial processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and a part of the processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the pachinko in the second embodiment. This is different from the machine 10. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 70. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with the hit type storage area 203f and the fluctuation number counter 203g. Has been done. The hit type storage area 203f is an area for storing data according to the jackpot type, and the previous jackpot type can be specified based on the data stored in this area. Further, the fluctuation number counter 203g is a counter that counts the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the end of the jackpot, and is cleared to 0 each time the jackpot is won.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the rank information storage area 223e is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the effect of increasing the rank of the display image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Data for specifying this rank is stored in the rank information storage area 223e, and control is performed so that an appropriate effect according to the current rank is executed based on the stored data.

Further, FIGS. 64 to 70 are a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, and a diagram showing various data defined in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 64A, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is provided with a disconnection selection table 202j in addition to the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment. The details will be described later, but the out-of-order selection table 202j includes the previous jackpot type (type of the first symbol) and the special symbol executed after the jackpot from a plurality of tables defined in the variable type selection table 202d. It is a table used to select one table according to the number of lottery.

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64 (b). In the present embodiment, there are 14 types of jackpots: "time saving jackpot A" to "time saving jackpot C", "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot H", and "latent probability variation jackpot A" to "latent probability variation jackpot C". There is a big hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", "time saving jackpot A" is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2. When is in the range of "70 to 89", "time saving jackpot B" is selected, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 99", "time saving jackpot C" is selected. Will be done.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "100 to 101", "probability variation jackpot A" is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "102 to 106". In that case, "probability variation jackpot B" is selected, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "107 to 111", "probability variation jackpot C" is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2. When is in the range of "112 to 126", "probability variation jackpot D" is selected. Further, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "127 to 141", "probability variation jackpot E" is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "142 to 151". In that case, "probability variation jackpot F" is selected, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "152 to 161", "probability variation jackpot G" is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2. When is in the range of "162 to 171", "probability variation jackpot H" is selected.

Then, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "172 to 176", "latent probability variation jackpot A" is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "177 to 186". If there is, "latent probability variation jackpot B" is selected, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "187 to 199", "latent probability variation jackpot A" is selected.

In addition, "time saving jackpot A" to "time saving jackpot C" differ from each other in the selection method of the fluctuation pattern type after the jackpot ends, but other than that (the number of rounds of the jackpot, the number of time saving of the normal symbol, etc.), the number is the same. 2 It is the same as the "big hit A (time saving big hit)" of the embodiment. Further, regarding "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot H", the selection method of the fluctuation pattern type after the jackpot ends is different from each other, but other operations such as the number of rounds of the jackpot are described in "big hit B" of the second embodiment. (Probability change jackpot) ”is the same. Similarly, the "latent probability variation jackpot A" to "latent probability variation jackpot C" are the same as the "big hit C (latent probability variation jackpot)" of the second embodiment except for the operation of selecting the variation pattern type.

In this way, by providing a wide variety of jackpots with different selection methods for the variable pattern type, it is possible to execute various variable pattern effects, so that it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming monotonous. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the variation type selection table 202d defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation type selection table 202d. In the variable type selection table 202d of the second embodiment, three types of tables are defined: a hit selection table 202d1, a special figure 1 deviation selection table 202d2, and a special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3. In the present embodiment, in addition to the above three types of tables, a selection table for latency 202d4, a selection table for promotion period 202d5, a selection table for promotion period 202d6, a selection table for promotion period 202d7, a selection table for promotion period 202d8, and promotion Nine types of tables are provided: a period selection table 202d9, a promotion period selection table 202d10, a promotion period end selection table 202d11, and a promotion period end selection table 202d12.

The latent selection table 202d4 has shifted to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, but the player was not notified that the special symbol has shifted to the high-probability state in the rank-up effect. In this case, it is a table used to select the mode of the out-of-order variation effect of the end of the rank-up effect.

Further, the promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table that is referred to during the period in which the rank-up effect is executed, and is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the rank-up is not selected. On the other hand, the promotion period selection table 202d6 is a table in which the probability that the variation type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to a low probability (30%). Further, in the promotion period selection table 202d7, the probability that the variation type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to a medium level (50%), and the promotion period selection table 202d8 is the variation corresponding to the rank up. The probability that the type data is selected is set to a high probability (70%), and in the promotion period selection table 202d9, the probability that the variable type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to the maximum (90%). ing. Further, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which variable type data corresponding to the effect of raising the rank up to the maximum rank at once is always selected regardless of the current rank status.

Further, the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect for notifying that the rank has not been raised to the maximum is always selected in the rank-up effect, and is for the end of the promotion period. The selection table 202d12 is a table in which variable type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has been increased to the maximum rank in the rank-up effect (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol) is always selected. By selecting each of these tables according to the type of jackpot and the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot is completed, a wide variety of effects can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In FIG. 65, in order to simplify the explanation, No. 0-No. Although the numbers 11 are associated with each other, in an actual program, different labels are associated with the start address of each table. Then, when the table is read by other processing, each table is read by the label associated with each table. As a result, when diverting the program, only the label definition needs to be changed, and it is not necessary to modify the program for each process of reading the table, so that it is possible to suppress data typos by the program creator. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the provision of incorrect data. Examples of label names associated with each table are, for example, "C_TBL0" to "C_TBL11".

Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (a), after the jackpot ends, the player shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol. The details of the latent selection table 202d4 used for selecting the variation pattern type at the time of disconnection when not notified will be described. FIG. 66A is a diagram showing the value of the variation type data selected for each value of the variation type counter CS1 defined in the latent selection table 202d4. As shown in FIG. 66A, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, "07H" is selected as the variation type data, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 174. For example, if "08H" is selected as the fluctuation type data and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 175 to 189, "09H" is selected as the fluctuation type data and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 190 to 199. If it is in the range of, "0AH" is selected as the variation type data.

In the latent selection table 202d4, the selection ratio of "07H", which is the variation type data corresponding to the complete deviation, is set lower than that of the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3 (FIG. 9B). The rate at which variable type data corresponding to out-of-order short reach, out-of-order long reach, and out-of-order super reach is selected is set high. That is, when the latent selection table 202d4 is selected, it becomes easy to select the fluctuation pattern type having a long fluctuation time. As a result, even if the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol is not notified in the rank-up effect, the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol is internally performed by the continuous variation pattern effect having a long fluctuation period. You can expect the player to be there. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 66B, the promotion period selection table 202d5, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. The promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table in which rank-up does not occur. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 99, the fluctuation time is short and the fluctuation pattern type (short fluctuation for promotion period) that fails to rank up is supported. If "0BH", which is the fluctuation type data to be used, is selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 100 to 199, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation pattern type (for promotion period) that fails to rank up. “0CH”, which is the variation type data corresponding to the long variation A), is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (c), the promotion period selection table 202d6, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. The promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table in which the probability of rank-up occurring is set to a low probability (30%). As shown in FIG. 66 (c), if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 79, the fluctuation time is short and the fluctuation pattern type (short fluctuation for promotion period) that fails to rank up is supported. If "0BH", which is the fluctuation type data to be used, is selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 80 to 139, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation pattern type (for promotion period) that fails to rank up. “0CH”, which is the fluctuation type data corresponding to the middle fluctuation A), is selected. Further, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 140 to 199, the fluctuation type data corresponds to the fluctuation type (middle fluctuation B for promotion period) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and the rank is successfully upgraded. "0DH" is selected.

The promotion period selection table 202d7 to the promotion period selection table 202d9 are variation type data corresponding to the variation type (middle variation B for promotion period) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and the rank is successfully upgraded. Since the proportion of "0DH" selected is only increasing, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the promotion period selection table 202d10, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a). As described above, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which the variable type that ranks up to the highest rank is selected regardless of the current rank. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the promotion period selection table 202d10 is selected, all the values of the variation type counter CS1 correspond to the variation type (long variation A for promotion period) that ranks up to the highest rank. "0EH", which is the variable type data to be used, is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67 (b), a selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period, which is a table referred to at the end of the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has not been raised to the maximum is always selected in the rank-up effect. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the selection table 202d11 at the end of the promotion period is selected, the fluctuation type for notifying that the rank has not been fully upgraded to the maximum rank in all the fluctuation type counter CS1 values. “0FH”, which is the variation type data corresponding to (long variation B for promotion period), is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67 (c), a selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period, which is a table referred to at the end of the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, in the selection table 202d12 at the end of the promotion period, the variable type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has been raised to the maximum rank (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol) is always selected. Table. As shown in FIG. 67 (c), when the selection table 202d12 at the end of the promotion period is selected, the variation type (promotion period) for notifying that the rank has been upgraded to the maximum rank in all the values of the variation type counter CS1. “10H”, which is the variation type data corresponding to the long variation C), is selected.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to refer to the various tables described above so that a wide variety of variable pattern effects can be selected according to the game situation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the production from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment with reference to FIG. 68, the offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the configuration of the offset setting table 202e. As shown in FIG. 68, in the offset setting table 202e in the third embodiment, in addition to the offset setting table 202e in the second embodiment, the pattern selection offset value corresponding to the variation type selected in the rank-up period and the variation The correspondence with the value of the type data is specified. More specifically, the pattern selection offset value "14H" is associated with the variation type data value "0BH", and the pattern selection offset value "15H" is associated with the variation type data value "0CH". The pattern selection offset value "16H" is associated with the variation type data value "0DH", and the pattern selection offset value "17H" is associated with the variation type data value "0EH". The pattern selection offset value "18H" is associated with the variation type data value "0FH", and the pattern selection offset value "19H" is associated with the variation type data value "10H". There is.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting the variation pattern type based on the pattern selection offset value will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 69, in the variation pattern selection table 202f in the third embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern selection table 202f in the second embodiment, the variation pattern type selected in the rank-up period is defined.

More specifically, address 1B09H has a fluctuation time of 6 seconds, and a fluctuation pattern type (short variation for promotion period) that fails to rank up is defined, and address 1B0AH has a fluctuation time of 8 seconds. A variation pattern type that exists and fails to rank up (middle variation A for promotion period) is defined, and a variation pattern type that has a variation time of 9 seconds and succeeds in rank upgrade (promotion period) at address 1B0BH. Middle fluctuation B) is specified. Further, the fluctuation time is 12 seconds for the address 1B0CH, and the fluctuation pattern type (long fluctuation B for the promotion period) that is promoted to the maximum rank is defined, and the fluctuation time is 13 seconds for the address 1B0DH. In addition, a variation pattern type (long variation B for promotion period) for notifying that the maximum rank could not be promoted in the rank-up effect is defined, and the variation time is 14 seconds at the address 1B0EH, and the rank. The variation pattern type (long variation C for promotion period) for notifying that the player has been promoted to the maximum rank in the up effect is specified.

By defining a wide variety of fluctuation pattern types in this way, various fluctuation pattern types can be selected according to the state of the game, so that it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the disconnection selection table 202j defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The out-of-order selection table 202j is a table in which the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the end of the jackpot (the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot) and the table referred to for selecting the variation type data are used for each of the previous jackpot types. It is a table that defines the relationship. In FIG. 70, “No.” represents “No.” attached to each table defined in the variable type selection table 202d (see FIG. 65).

As shown in FIG. 70, for example, when the previous jackpot was "time saving jackpot A", the special symbol lottery is performed from the end of the time saving jackpot A until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 9 times. Every time it comes off, No. 1 is displayed in the variable type selection table 202d. Read the table of 5 and refer to it to select the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 5 means the selection table 202d6 for the promotion period, in the lottery of each special symbol, in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect of succeeding in ranking up only with a probability of 30% is achieved. Not done. In addition, in the 10th special symbol lottery, No. The table of 10 is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 10 means the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period, an effect for notifying that the rank could not be raised to the maximum rank is performed in the variation pattern effect. Then, in the 11th and subsequent lottery of special symbols, No. Table 1 or No. Any one of the tables of 2 (that is, either the special drawing 1 deviation selection table 202d2 or the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

Further, for example, when the previous jackpot is "probability change jackpot D", it changes every time the special symbol lottery is missed from the end of the probability variation jackpot D to the end of the special symbol lottery 9 times. From the type selection table 202d, No. Read the table of No. 7 and refer to it to select the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 7 means the selection table 202d8 for the promotion period, in the lottery of each special symbol, in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect of succeeding in ranking up is performed with a probability of 70%. Will be. In addition, in the 10th special symbol lottery, No. The table of 11 is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 11 means the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period, in order to notify that the rank has been raised to the maximum rank (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol) in the fluctuation pattern production. Is performed. Then, in the 11th and subsequent lottery of special symbols, No. Table 1 or No. Any one of the tables of 2 (that is, either the special drawing 1 deviation selection table 202d2 or the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

Also, for example, if the previous jackpot was "probability change jackpot G", it will change each time the special symbol lottery is missed from the end of the probability variation jackpot G until the special symbol lottery is completed four times. From the type selection table 202d, No. Read the table of 8 and refer to it to select the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 8 means the selection table 202d9 for the promotion period, in the lottery of each special symbol, in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect of succeeding in ranking up is performed with a probability of 90%. Will be. In addition, in the 5th special symbol lottery, No. Read the table of 9 and refer to it to select the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 9 means the selection table 202d10 for the end of the promotion period, the effect of raising the rank to the maximum rank is performed in the variation pattern effect. Then, in the 6th and subsequent lottery of special symbols, No. Table 1 or No. Any one of the tables of 2 (that is, either the special drawing 1 deviation selection table 202d2 or the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

In addition, even though the previous jackpot is "Time saving jackpot A" to "Time saving jackpot C" and "Hidden probability variation jackpot A" to "Hidden probability variation jackpot C", it will not rise to the highest rank by rank up. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured so that the current rank can be grasped. Specifically, the current rank is determined based on the rank information stored in the rank information storage area 223e. Then, in a state where the rank information is one rank lower than the maximum rank, the fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the rank up (that is, the long fluctuation A for the promotion period with the fluctuation time of 12 seconds) is changed by the fluctuation pattern command. When notified, the variation time is the same (12 seconds), and the mode of the variation pattern effect that fails to rank up is selected. Then, the display variation pattern command is set based on the selected mode.

Although not shown, the selection table 202j at the time of disconnection includes the number of lottery of special symbols when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed, and the table to be selected. Correspondence relationship of is also stipulated. When the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed, for example, regardless of the number of times the special symbol is drawn, the selection for removing the special figure 1 is performed until the first big hit is won. It is configured so that either the table 202d2 or the selection table 202d3 for removing the special figure 2 is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rank-up effect from occurring immediately after the power is turned on (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). Therefore, even though there is no possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol, the rank-up effect occurs, the player is confused, and it becomes difficult to have a sense of expectation for the rank-up effect. Can be suppressed.

The control when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed is not limited to this. For example, the variation type selection table 202d may be configured to prepare a table that is selected only during the period from when the power is turned on until the first jackpot is won, so that a dedicated variation pattern type is displayed. .. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) of the pachinko machine 10 is often pressed when the hall is opened. Therefore, by preparing a dedicated variation pattern type, the player can use it exclusively. You can look forward to the fluctuation pattern type. Therefore, since the player can start the game immediately after the store opens, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall can be improved.

Next, a specific example of the rank-up effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the rank-up period will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. In the rank-up effect of the present embodiment, the rank D, which is the lowest rank, is set after the jackpot ends. Then, each time the variation pattern type corresponding to the rank increase is selected, the rank is increased in the order of rank C, rank B, rank A, and rank S. Further, if the rank is increased to rank S, the player is notified that the special symbol has shifted to the high probability state.

FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is fluctuating in the case of rank D, which is the lowest rank in the rank-up period. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), “Rank D” is displayed in the rectangular area provided on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation of the third symbol. That is, the rectangular area provided in the upper left is an area for displaying the current rank information.

Further, in the horizontally long substantially rectangular area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, "rank up with the appearance of the chance eye (341)" is displayed. With this display content, the player is notified that the rank will be upgraded when a combination of "3", "4", and "1", which is a chance eye, appears as a result of the fluctuation pattern production. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play with the expectation that a chance eye will appear.

Further, in the rectangular area provided in the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, "promotion chance remaining 9 times" is displayed. This number of times is a number indicating how many times the rank-up period remains, and is subtracted and displayed by 1 each time the variation pattern effect is executed once.

Further, an image of the ground is displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, plants grow on the ground according to the rank, and the plants bloom at the highest rank (see FIG. 74). By displaying the visually easy-to-understand effect in this way, the player can easily recognize the current rank.

FIG. 71B is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is not increased as a result of the variation pattern effect executed during the rank-up period. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the rank is not increased (that is, when the short fluctuation for the promotion period or the middle fluctuation A for the promotion period is selected as the fluctuation pattern type), it is the chance eye "3". , "4", and combinations other than "1" (combinations of "3", "8", and "1" in the example of FIG. 71 (b)) are stopped and displayed. Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed so as to notify the player that the rank could not be upgraded.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is increased will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the display contents when the rank is increased in the rank D which is the lowest rank. When upgrading the rank, first, the symbols "3", "4", and "1", which are combinations of chance eyes, are displayed, and at the same time, with respect to the ground displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. , The effect of light coming in from above is displayed (see FIG. 72 (a)). Then, as the plant sprouts appear on the ground, "Rank up !!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 72 (b)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been increased. Further, "Rank D → C" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 72 (b)). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the rank has been increased from rank D to rank C by this rank increase.

Next, when the rank is increased from rank C to rank B, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). As shown in FIG. 73A, when the rank is increased from rank C to rank B, the buds displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 grow. Specifically, the number of leaves of the plant increases to four, and the total length of the plant doubles. Further, as in the case of ranking up from rank D to rank C, "Rank up !!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, "Rank C → B" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to rank B by this rank up. Although not shown, the effect of shining light from above on the buds of the plant is performed before the plant grows. That is, even when the rank is upgraded to rank B, the same effect as in FIG. 72 (a) is performed. It should be noted that the same effect is performed when the rank is raised to rank A or rank S, but the illustration is omitted.

Next, a case where the rank is increased from rank B to rank A will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the rank is increased from rank B to rank A, the plant displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 grows further, and flower buds are displayed at the tip of the plant. Will be done. Further, as in the case of ranking up to rank C or rank B, "rank up !!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, "Rank B → A" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to rank A by this rank up.

Next, a case of increasing the rank from rank A to rank S will be described with reference to FIG. 74. As shown in FIG. 74, when the rank is increased from rank A to rank S, the flowered state of the plant displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Further, as in the case of ranking up to another rank, "Rank up !!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, "Rank A → S" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to rank S by this rank up.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern effect executed at the end of the rank-up period will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is raised to the highest rank, and FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing the case where the rank is not raised to the highest rank. It is a figure which shows the display content which is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when notifying the player that the player has been ranked up to the highest rank and has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol, "3" is used as the stop symbol of the third symbol. The chance eye consisting of the combination of "4" and "1" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the flowering plant on the right side shines. In addition, the characters "probability change rush!" Are displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "promotion" are displayed in the upper right area of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. Actually, when the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but by displaying the word "promotion", the player launches the ball during the rank-up period. Depending on the timing etc., it can be made to feel as if the special symbol has been shifted to the high probability state by itself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), if the maximum rank cannot be reached during the rank-up period, the stop symbol other than the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the stop symbol of the third symbol. (In the example of FIG. 75 (b), the combination of "3", "5", and "1"), the plant on the right side is displayed in a dead state. Further, the characters "promotion failure ..." are displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, and "promotion chance remaining" is displayed in the upper right area of the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the characters "0 times", it is possible to make the player recognize that the rank could not be increased to the maximum rank.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main control device 110, and as described above, the special symbol hold ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81.

In each of the jackpot determination processes (S208), S301 to S307 and S310, the same processes as those of S301 to S307 and S310 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are performed. Will be executed. Then, in the jackpot determination process in the third embodiment, the jackpot setting process 2 (S321) and the missed time setting process 2 (S321) are replaced with the jackpot setting process (S308) and the missed time setting process 2 (S311) in the second embodiment. Setting process 3 (S322) is executed.

That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the third embodiment, in the process of S307, it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any random number value defined in the comparison source table. In the case (S307: Yes), the jackpot setting process 2 (S321) is executed, and the process shifts to S310. Similar to the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, the jackpot setting process 2 is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol.

On the other hand, in the processing of S307, when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 does not match any of the random number values specified in the comparison source table (S307: No), the setting process at the time of loss 3 is executed (S322), and the process shifts to S310. Similar to the disconnection setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, the disconnection setting process 3 is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment.

Next, the jackpot setting process 2 (S321) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 2 (S321). Of the jackpot setting process 2 (S321), each of the processes S401 to S408 executes the same process as the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. Then, in the jackpot setting process 2 in the third embodiment, after the jackpot type is determined in the process of S402, the data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the hit type storage area 203f (S411). Here, as the data according to the jackpot type, for example, values from "00H" to "0DH" are assigned in the order of the jackpot type specified in the first hit type selection table 202b, and assigned to the current jackpot type. The obtained value may be stored in the hit type storage area 203f.

Next, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g is cleared (S412), and the process shifts to S403. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to determine the type of fluctuation pattern based on the data corresponding to the jackpot type stored in the hit type storage area 203f and the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the above-mentioned disconnection setting process 2 (S311) will be described. The disconnection setting process is a process executed in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 61) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and as described above, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, the mode of the variation pattern is changed. This is a process for setting. In each of the out-of-order setting processes 3 (S322), S601, S604, and S611 to S613, the same processes as those in the out-of-off time setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) are executed. Then, in the disconnection setting process 3 in the third embodiment, first, 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 203 g (S621). Then, the table to be referred to is changed based on the loss selection table 202j from the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g after adding 1 and the information based on the previous jackpot jackpot type stored in the hit type storage area 203f. Select from the type selection table 202d (S622). Then, when the processing of S622 is completed, the processing shifts to S601. By the processing of S621 and S622, a wide variety of variation patterns can be executed based on the jackpot type of the jackpot won last time and the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the out-of-order setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) of the present embodiment fluctuates based on the information stored in the hit type storage area 202f and the value of the fluctuation number counter 202g regardless of the state of the gaming machine. It is configured to select the table for selecting the type data, but only in the high probability state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the information stored in the type storage area 202f and the fluctuation count counter 202g It may be configured to select a table for selecting variation type data based on the value of. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, either the special figure 1 out-of-order selection table 202d2 or the special figure 2 out-of-order selection table 202d3 May be configured to be selected. As a result, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, a table for selecting the variable type data based only on the type of the entry port into which the ball has entered is selected from the variable type selection table 202d. Because it can be done, the judgment condition can be reduced. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the variation display setting process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a variation display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. This variation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the main process is performed. This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110.

In each of the variable display setting processes (S1712), S1901 to S1903 and S1905 to S1910, the same processes as those of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed. .. Then, in the command determination process in the third embodiment, when the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is acquired in the process of S1903 (S1903), the extracted variation pattern and the rank information storage area are obtained. Based on the information about the current rank stored in 223e, a display variation pattern command corresponding to an appropriate variation pattern production according to the rank is set (S1911). After the processing of S1911 is completed, the processing shifts to S1905.

By setting the display variation pattern command in consideration of the information about the rank stored in the rank information storage area 223e, an appropriate display effect according to the rank is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the rank-up effect. Can be made to.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 84. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed, the variation pattern differs depending on the jackpot type of the previous jackpot and the number of lottery of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot. It was configured so that the type was selected. In this modification, in addition to this, a different fluctuation pattern type is selected according to the fluctuation pattern type selected when the previous jackpot is notified. As a result, the variation pattern effect can be executed in a wider variety of modes than the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 80, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is shown. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment. In this modification, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a variation type storage area 203h for storing information for identifying the variation pattern type when notifying the previous jackpot. The difference is that they are. The details will be described later, but if the lottery for the special symbol is not performed, the variation pattern type is set based on the information stored in the variation type storage area 203h. The other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment.

Next, the variation type selection table 202d in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81A is a diagram showing a variation type selection table 202d defined in ROM 202 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in this modification, the variation type selection table 202d shows the No. A special mode selection table 202d13 has been added as a table corresponding to 13. Although the details will be described later, the special mode selection table 202d13 shows that when the mode of the fluctuation pattern effect when notifying the previous jackpot is executed in the so-called premium reach mode, the variation pattern effect after the jackpot is produced. It is a table referred to when selecting an aspect. This special mode selection table is a table that may be selected after the jackpot ends when a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol is won, and the fluctuation time is extremely short (for example, 0. 5 seconds) Fluctuation type data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type is specified.

Further, instead of the hit selection table 202d1 in the third embodiment, No. 13, No. A selection table 202d14 for non-probability variation and a selection table 202d15 for probability variation are added to 14, respectively. In this modification, the variation type data is selected from different tables depending on whether or not the probability variation jackpots A to H are won. Furthermore, the variable type data corresponding to the hit premium reach is specified only in the table referred to at the time of the probability change jackpot. As a result, the premium reach occurs only in the case of the probability change jackpot, so the player who recognizes that the reach this time is the premium reach recognizes that the player shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol during the fluctuation pattern production. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. When this hit premium reach is set, for example, an effect of flowering a plant may be executed as a display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Normally, it informs whether or not the plant has transitioned to the high probability state of the special symbol depending on whether or not the plant blooms during the rank-up period after the jackpot ends, but if the hit premium reach is displayed, The effect that the plant blooms before entering the rank-up period will be displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is made before the transition to the jackpot state.

FIG. 81B is a diagram showing a selection table 202d14 for non-probability variation of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the non-probability variation hit selection table 202d14, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H is set as the variation type data corresponding to the hit short reach. When selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the hit long reach, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 180 to 199. If so, 02H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the winning super reach.

Further, FIG. 81 (c) is a diagram showing a selection table 202d15 for probability variation of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the non-probability variation hit selection table 202d15, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, 01H is set as the variation type data corresponding to the hit long reach. When selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 169, 02H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the hit super reach, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 170 to 199. If so, 11H is selected as the variable type data corresponding to the winning premium reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the detachment selection table 202j of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a selection table 202j at the time of deviation of this modification. As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when the previous jackpot was various probability variation jackpots, the fluctuation pattern type selected after the jackpot ends according to the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot was notified. Is different. Specifically, the previous jackpot type was jackpot A, and the variable pattern types selected when notifying the jackpot were "hit short reach", "hit long reach", and "hit super reach" (non-premium reach). If this is the case, the same table as the out-of-order selection table 202j in the third embodiment is selected from the variable type selection table 202d.

On the other hand, if the previous jackpot type was jackpot A and the variable pattern type was "winning premium reach" selected when notifying the jackpot, regardless of the number of special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, No. Twelve tables are selected. That is, the variation type data is selected from the special mode selection table 202d13. As described above, since the variation type data corresponding to the variation pattern type of the extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is defined in the selection table 202d13 for the special mode, the winning is not suspended. Since it is executed immediately, the game can proceed speedily. Therefore, since the perceived time until the next big hit can be shortened, the player can be made to feel that the big hits are continuous at very short intervals in the high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As for the probabilistic jackpots B to H, as with the probabilistic jackpot A, the fluctuation pattern types selected when notifying the jackpot are "hit short reach", "hit long reach", and "hit super reach" (non-premium reach). ), The same table as the out-of-order selection table 202j in the third embodiment is selected from the variable type selection table 202d. Then, when the variable pattern type is "win premium reach" selected when notifying the jackpot, No. 1 is determined regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot ends. Twelve tables are selected. In addition, although the illustration is omitted, when the previous jackpot is a time-saving jackpot A to C and a latent probability variation jackpot A to C, the third implementation is performed regardless of the fluctuation pattern type when notifying the jackpot. The same table as the out-of-order selection table 202j in the form is selected from the variation type selection table 202d.

In this modification, the table selected after the end of the jackpot notified by the hit premium reach is set to the special mode selection table 202d13 regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols, and the fluctuation time is extremely short (for example, 0.5 seconds). ) Was configured to be executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern type having a relatively long variation time (for example, 20 seconds) may be selected. Further, as a display effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display effect peculiar to the end of the jackpot (special mode) notified by the hit premium reach may be executed. With this configuration, the player can play the game with one pleasure to see the unique effect displayed only in the special mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As an example of the display effect in the variable pattern effect executed after the end of the big hit, for example, the plant in the flowered state may be configured to execute the effect of producing fruits. That is, if the fruit is fruitful, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and if the fruit is not fruitful, it indicates that the lottery of the special symbol is not accepted. By configuring in this way, the winning premium reach is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, the story shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, and in the flow until the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a series of sexual display effects. Further, in order to further enhance the relevance of the effect, the display effect during the jackpot may also be a plant-related effect. For example, if a hit premium reach is used to produce a flowering effect and a jackpot is notified, even if a fireworks display is launched in the background to celebrate the flowering of the plant at the notified jackpot. good. With this configuration, the connection between the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the hit premium reach and the variable pattern effect after the big hit becomes easier to understand. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this modified example, if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A to H, the variation pattern effect can be selected in the mode of the hit premium reach, but some of the jackpots A to H (for example, the probability variation jackpot A to H) , Probability change jackpot A) may be configured so that the hit premium reach is selected only. That is, in the variation type selection table 202d, for example, even in the case of the probability variation jackpots B to H, the variation type data is selected with reference to the non-probability variation hit selection table 202d14, and the probability variation jackpot selection is performed only in the case of the probability variation jackpot A. Table 202d15 may be configured to be selected. In addition, a dedicated table for probabilistic jackpots B to H is provided, and the mode of hit premium reach is not selected, but variable type data is selected in a form different from time-saving jackpots A to C and latent probabilistic jackpots A to C. It may be configured as. In this way, if the hit premium reach is selected only for a part of the probabilistic jackpots A to H (for example, jackpot A), the hit premium reach and the state after the jackpot A is completed (special). Mode) can be made rare. Therefore, when a winning premium reach or a special mode appears, it is possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment.

Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. First, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process (S208) of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. Among the jackpot determination processes of this modification, the processes of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 are the same as the processes of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 76) in the third embodiment. Is executed.

Further, in the jackpot determination process of this modification, the result of comparing the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a with the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. When it is determined that there is no matching random number value (S307: No), the loss time setting process 4 is executed (S331) instead of the loss time setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment. The process shifts to S310. The out-of-order setting process 4 is a process for setting a variation pattern type for notifying that the lottery of the special symbol has been missed. The details of the disconnection setting process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 84, which follows.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the setting process 4 at the time of disconnection. In the disconnection time setting process 4, each of the processes S601, S604, S611 to S614, and S621 executes the same process as the disconnection time setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment. Further, in the out-of-order setting process 4 of this modification, when 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g in the processing of S621 (S621), then the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g, the jackpot type of the previous jackpot, and From the fluctuation pattern type at the time of notifying the previous jackpot, the table defined at the corresponding position of the out-of-order selection table 202j is selected (S631). The fluctuation pattern type when the previous jackpot is notified is determined based on the information stored in the fluctuation type storage area 202h. Specifically, when selecting a jackpot fluctuation pattern type, for example, a pattern selection offset value is stored as information that can identify the fluctuation pattern type. When the process of S631 is completed, the process shifts to S601.

By this loss time setting process 4, in addition to the previous jackpot type and the number of lottery of special symbols, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of the previous jackpot can be referred to and the fluctuation pattern type can be selected. It is possible to execute a wider variety of variation pattern effects than the pachinko machine 10 of the above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the out-of-order setting process 4 (see FIG. 84) of this modification, the information stored in the hit type storage area 202f, the value of the fluctuation number counter 202g, and the fluctuation type storage area are performed regardless of the state of the gaming machine. It is configured to select the table for selecting the fluctuation type data based on the information about the fluctuation pattern type in the previous jackpot stored in 202h, but the high probability state of the special symbol or the normal symbol The fluctuation type data is stored based on the information stored in the hit type storage area 202f only in the time saving state, the value of the fluctuation number counter 202g, and the information on the fluctuation pattern type in the previous jackpot stored in the fluctuation type storage area 202h. It may be configured to select a table for selection. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, either the special figure 1 out-of-order selection table 202d2 or the special figure 2 out-of-order selection table 202d3 May be configured to be selected. As a result, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, a table for selecting the variable type data based only on the type of the entry port into which the ball has entered is selected from the variable type selection table 202d. Because it can be done, the judgment condition can be reduced. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and its modified example, when setting the variation pattern effect, not only the lottery result of the special symbol and the entrance port where the ball entered, but also the previous winning. The table is selected based on the jackpot type of the jackpot and the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. As a result, it is possible to execute a wide variety of variable pattern effects, so that it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and its modified example, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. .. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variable type data with the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the variable type counter value is set in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting to an offset value. Therefore, one of the most important processes in the game, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern effect, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and its modified example, the rank-up effect is configured to continue until the lottery of special symbols is performed 10 times at the longest, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until the lottery is performed four times, or it may be configured to continue until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 20 times.

Further, in the third embodiment and its modification, five ranks of rank D, rank C, rank B, rank A, and rank S are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a three-level rank may be provided, or a ten-level rank may be provided. Further, the rank-up does not necessarily have to be performed one step at a time, and a pattern may be provided in which the rank is raised by two steps or by three steps.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, it is configured to be notified that a transition to a high probability state of a special symbol is made when the maximum rank is reached, but the content to be notified is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, it may notify that a long period is selected as the time saving period of the ordinary symbol given after the big hit.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, the table selected from the variable type selection table 202d is configured so as not to change after the end of the rank-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery of special symbols is performed 100 times or more after the jackpot is finished, the tables to be selected may be different. As a result, when the variation pattern effect is executed 100 times or more, the variation pattern effect having a different mode is selected, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, the table to be selected may be changed when the lottery of the special symbol is performed 500 times or more or 1000 times or more after the jackpot is completed. As a result, it is possible to provide a mode of variable pattern production that cannot be seen unless the special symbol is drawn 500 times or 1000 times or more in succession. Therefore, even if the lottery of special symbols continues to be missed, the player can be motivated to continue the game by seeing different modes of variable pattern production.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the table for selecting the variable type data is selected from the variable type selection table 202d based on the previous jackpot type. However, the conditions for selecting a table are not limited to this. For example, the table may be selected according to the time zone in which the variation pattern effect is executed, the type of the background image at the time of execution, the remaining number of times in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the like. As a result, the variable pattern effect can be executed in a wide variety of modes, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, when the probabilistic jackpots A to H are won, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the variation pattern type in the mode of hit premium reach, but this is limited to this. It suffices as long as it informs the player that it will be in an advantageous state. For example, the premium reach may be selected when the result of the lottery this time is a big hit and the winning prize that becomes the big hit is reserved. As a result, by executing the variable pattern effect in the mode of hit premium reach, it is possible to make the player recognize that the big hits are continuous in an extremely short period of time, so that the player is greatly satisfied. Can be given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the modified example of the third embodiment, when the previous jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot A to H, the lottery result of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is out of order according to the mode of the variation pattern effect that notified the jackpot. The variation pattern type selected for is different, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a short-time hit A is won by a hit short reach or a hit long reach, the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which the rank-up occurs with a low probability (30%) in the rank-up period is selected. If the time-saving jackpot A is won by the hit super reach, the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which the rank-up occurs with a high probability (70%) in the rank-up period may be selected. Further, for example, when the probability variation jackpot A is won by the hit short reach or the hit long reach, the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which the rank up occurs with a high probability (70%) in the rank up period is selected. If the probability variation jackpot A is won by the hit super reach, the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which the rank up occurs with a low probability (30%) in the rank up period may be selected.

With this configuration, if a jackpot is notified by a hit short reach, the higher the rank, the higher the expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d8 will be selected, so the previous jackpot will definitely change. It is possible to raise the expectation for being a jackpot A (that is, shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol). In addition, when the jackpot is notified by the hit super reach, the expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d6 is selected increases as the effect of failing to rank up occurs, so the previous jackpot is a probability change jackpot A. It is possible to raise the expectation for being (that is, shifting to a high-probability state of a special symbol). That is, depending on the fluctuation pattern type when notifying the previous jackpot, the player may be requested to frequently raise the rank, or conversely, the player may be requested not to raise the rank. Therefore, different playability can be realized even with the same rank-up effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the gaming machines of each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, it is referred to in order to select the variable type data according to the type of the entry port into which the ball has entered, the number of reserved balls, and the like. It was configured so that a different table was selected as the table, but even if the lottery result of the special symbol was won, a different table was selected from the variable type selection table 202d according to the situation of the game. You may. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variable pattern effect for notifying the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Feature A group> (Set the data specified in the table using the label)
The control from a control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, a storage means for storing a plurality of information groups composed of one or a plurality of pieces of information for the control means to control, and the storage means thereof. The information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups used for control by the means, and the head position designating means for indicating the head position of a predetermined information group among the storage areas in which the plurality of information groups are stored are provided. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the information group selection means selects the information group of 1 based on the head position indicated by the head position designating means.

According to the gaming machine A1, a plurality of information groups composed of one or a plurality of pieces of information for the control means to control are stored in the storage means, and one information group used for control by the control means from the storage means is stored. , Selected by information group selection means. Among the storage areas in which a plurality of information groups are stored, the head position of a predetermined information group is indicated by the head position designating means, and the information group selecting means indicates the head position based on the head position indicated by the head position designating means. Information group 1 is selected.

As a result, it is sufficient to read the head position of a predetermined information group in the control process for designating one information group, and it is not necessary to individually describe the information constituting the information group in the program. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large amount of information on the program, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a value rewriting error. Therefore, there is an effect that the malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designating means is set. The predetermined means from the designated means, the head position of the predetermined information group indicated by the head position designating means, and the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designated means. The information group selection means includes a head position designated by the head position designating means and information calculated by the information number calculating means. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the information group of 1 is selected from the number of machines.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designating means is indicated by the designating means. From the start position of the predetermined information group indicated by the start position designating means and the start position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designation means, the predetermined information group is obtained by the information number calculation means. The number of constituent information is calculated. One information group is selected by the information group selection means from the head position designated by the head position designating means and the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means.

As a result, it is not necessary to numerically specify the number of information constituting the information group in the program. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model having a different number of information constituting the information group, the information group is configured. In the process using the number, the step of rewriting the number can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a correction error of the program creator.

In the gaming machine A2, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information, and each information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in the plurality of addresses one by one. A game machine A3 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses that can store information. Each piece of information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in the plurality of addresses.

As a result, the number of addresses in which information is stored matches the number of information constituting the information group, so that the number of information can be easily calculated by the information number calculation means based on the range of addresses in which information is stored. Has the effect of being able to calculate.

In the gaming machine A3, the first address among the plurality of addresses in which the plurality of the information groups are stored is associated with identification data for identifying the information group, and the head position is associated with the identification data. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the designation means and the designation means designate the start address of the information group based on the identification data.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, identification data for identifying the information group is associated with the first address among the plurality of addresses in which the plurality of information groups are stored, and the head position designating means, based on the identification data, And the start address of the information group is specified by the designated means.

As a result, the start position designation means and the designation means do not need to specify the start position by the address itself, so even if the storage address of each information group is changed when the program is diverted to another model. , It is not necessary to rewrite the start position in the control processing program that reads out each information group. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in rewriting the program.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, an acquisition means for acquiring random information, a comparison means for comparing the random information acquired by the acquisition means with the information group selected by the information group selection means, and a comparison means. The gaming machine A5 is characterized by comprising a privilege game granting means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the comparison result by the comparison means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the information group selected by the information group selection means are compared by the comparison means, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is given based on the comparison result by the comparison means. Whether or not to do so is determined by the privilege game granting means.

As a result, it is possible to randomly determine whether or not to grant the privileged game, which has the effect of giving the player a sense of fairness.

In the gaming machine A5, the comparison means compares the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means with the random information in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored. A featured gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means is random information in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored by the comparison means. Since they are compared, the information to be compared with the random information next can be specified by a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when comparing by the comparison means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A6, the comparison means includes the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the information selected by the information group selection means as many times as the number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means. The gaming machine A7, characterized in that it compares with each information constituting the group.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, random information acquired by the acquiring means as many times as the number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculating means and selected by the information group selection means. Since the comparison with each information constituting the information group is performed by the comparison means, it is not necessary to separately determine the number of comparisons. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when comparing by the comparison means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when it is determined by the privilege game granting means to grant the privilege game, the random information acquired by the acquisition means is deleted before the privilege game is granted. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that it is provided with erasing means.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when it is decided to grant the privileged game by the privileged game granting means, it is acquired before the privileged game is granted by the erasing means. Since the random information acquired by the means is deleted, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the lottery result corresponding to the granting of the privilege game from being illegally acquired from the outside.

<Feature B group> (Calculate the number of data using labels)
It is composed of a control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, a storage means for storing a plurality of information, and a plurality of information which are a part of the storage means and are used for the control means to perform control. It is provided with a storage area for storing a plurality of information groups and an information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups used for control by the control means from the storage area, and all the information groups are a specific number having the same number. In the storage area, each information constituting the plurality of information groups is sequentially stored in a plurality of addresses associated with the storage area without any free address. The information group selection means selects the information group based on the start address of a predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number of information groups. Game machine B1 to play.

According to the gaming machine B1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of pieces of information are stored by the storage means, and a plurality of information groups composed of a plurality of pieces of information used by the control means for performing control are stored in a storage area that is a part of the storage means. From the storage area, one information group used for control by the control means is selected by the information group selection means. All information groups are composed of a specific number of pieces of information that are the same number. In the storage area, each information constituting the plurality of information groups is sequentially stored in the plurality of addresses associated with the storage area without any free address. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the start address of a predetermined information group stored in the storage area and a specific number of information groups.

As a result, the information group can be specified only by specifying the start address of the predetermined information group and the specific number, so it is necessary to specify the start position of each information group in the program. No. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large number of values such as the start position of each information group on the program, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a value rewriting error. Therefore, there is an effect that the malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B1, of the plurality of information groups stored in order in the storage area, an address designation means indicating the start address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group, and the predetermined information group. The gaming machine B2 is characterized by comprising a specific number calculation means for calculating the specific number from the start address of the information group and the address indicated by the address designation means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the plurality of information groups stored in order in the storage area, the start address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group is indicated by the address designation means. A specific number is calculated by the specific number calculation means from the start address of the predetermined information group and the address indicated by the address designation means.

As a result, it is not necessary to input a specific number in the program as a numerical value. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model having a different specific number, the specific number is input in each process of controlling using the specific number. The repairing step can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in modifying the program.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the identification information storage means for storing a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from the plurality of information groups, and the identification information storage means for storing the plurality of identification data. The identification information selection means for selecting one identification data from the plurality of identification data is provided, and the information group selection means includes the identification data of 1 selected by the identification information selection means and the storage area. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the information group is selected based on the start address of the information group stored at the beginning of the information group and the specific number of information groups.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from a plurality of information groups is stored in the identification information storage means, and from the plurality of identification data stored in the identification information storage means, One identification data is selected by the identification information selection means. The information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the identification data of 1 selected by the identification information selection means, the start address of the information group stored at the beginning of the storage area, and the specific number.

As a result, when any information group stored in the storage area is referred to in each control process, it is not necessary to individually specify and refer to the address in which the information specified in the information group is stored. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when selecting the information group by the information group selection means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B3, the information group selection means is ahead of the start address of the information group stored at the beginning of the storage area by the value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the information group defined at the position of is selected.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, only the value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number of the head addresses of the information groups stored at the head of the storage area is equal to the head address of the information group. Since the information group defined at the previous position is selected by the information group selection means, the information group can be selected by a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when selecting the information group by the information group selection means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, an information storage means capable of storing information and an information storage control means for controlling the information storage means to store one of the information groups selected by the information group selection means. The gaming machine B5, wherein the control means controls based on the information group stored in the information storage means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one information group selected by the information group selection means is controlled to be stored in the information storage means by the information storage control means, and is controlled based on the information group stored in the information storage means. Control is performed by means.

As a result, the control means may perform control based on the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance, and there is an effect that the processing load of the control means can be reduced.

The gaming machine B5 includes a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery and a privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the identification information. The selection means selects the identification data of 1 based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the predetermined lottery result, and selects the identification data of 1 selected by the identification information selection means. The gaming machine B6 is provided with holding means for holding until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the information group selection means selects the information group based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the lottery performed by the lottery means results in a predetermined lottery result, the privilege game granting means grants a privilege game that is advantageous to the player. Further, based on the lottery performed by the lottery means having a predetermined lottery result, the identification data of 1 is selected by the identification information selection means, and the identification data of the 1 is held until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the holding means. Will be done. Then, the information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the information group can be quickly selected and set based on the identification data of 1 held by the holding means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to the delay in setting the information group.

The gaming machine B6 is provided with an erasing means for erasing the lottery result by the lottery means based on the selection of the identification data of 1 by the identification information selecting means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the lottery result by the lottery means is erased by the erasing means based on the selection of the identification data of 1 by the identification information selection means. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of lottery results corresponding to the granting of games from the outside.

In the gaming machine B7, the holding means holds the identification data of 1 until the condition for ending the granting of the privilege game is satisfied, and the information group selection means ends the granting of the privilege game. The gaming machine B8, characterized in that the information group is selected based on the condition that the conditions are satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification data of 1 is held by the holding means until the condition for ending the granting of the privilege game is satisfied. In addition, the information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the condition for ending the granting of the privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined lottery result from being continuously held for a relatively long period from the start of granting the privilege game to the end of the granting of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of illegally obtaining a predetermined lottery result from the outside while the privilege game is being granted.

A gaming machine B9 in any of the gaming machines B3 to B8, wherein the identification data has a smaller amount of data than the specific number of pieces of information constituting the information group.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B8, the identification data has a smaller amount of data than the specific number of information constituting the information group, so that a specific number of information is stored in the holding means. The amount of data held in the holding means can be reduced as compared with the case of holding the data. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the holding means can be reduced.

<Characteristic C group> (Whether or not the reserved ball can be added is determined by whether or not the most significant bit is 1.)
A control means that controls the game according to a predetermined control procedure, a first storage means that stores a plurality of predetermined data, and a predetermined data stored in the first storage means are selected, and the control means is the game. A second storage means that stores a plurality of set values for making settings related to, a first selection means that selects one predetermined data from the first storage means, and predetermined data selected by the first selection means. 1 The setting value of 1 is selected from the second storage means based on the conversion means that performs a predetermined conversion on the predetermined data according to the situation of the game and the predetermined data of the 1 that has been subjected to the predetermined conversion by the conversion means. The game machine C1 is provided with a second selection means for setting.

According to the gaming machine C1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data are stored by the first storage means, selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of set values for the control means to make settings related to the game are set by the second storage means. It will be remembered. A predetermined data of 1 is selected from the first storage means by the first selection means, and whether or not the predetermined data selected by the first selection means contains specific information is determined by the specific information discriminating means. .. When it is determined by the specific information determining means that the predetermined data of 1 contains specific information, the conversion means performs a predetermined conversion on the predetermined data of 1, and the conversion means performs the predetermined conversion. Based on the predetermined data of 1, the set value of 1 is selected and set from the second storage means by the second selection means.

As a result, different conversions can be performed on the predetermined data of 1 according to the situation of the game by the conversion means, so that the second selection means can select different setting values according to the conversion contents. Therefore, the number of predetermined data stored in the first storage means can be made smaller than the number of set values stored in the second storage means, so that the capacity of the first storage means can be reduced. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine C1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the specific information is not included in the predetermined data of 1, the second storage means to 1 of 1 is based on the predetermined data of 1. The gaming machine C2 comprising a third selection means for selecting and setting a set value.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the predetermined data of 1 does not include the specific information, the third is based on the predetermined data of 1. Since the set value of 1 is selected and set from the second storage means by the storage means, the conversion by the conversion means can be omitted when the predetermined data of 1 that does not include specific information is selected. .. Therefore, there is an effect that processing addition can be reduced when specific information is not included in the predetermined data of 1.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the specific information determining means determines that the specific information is included in the predetermined data of 1 when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1. The gaming machine C3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1, the specific information is included in the predetermined data of 1 by the specific information determining means. Since it is determined that the data is present, it is not necessary to determine the data specified in the bits other than the most significant bit when determining whether or not specific information is included, and the determination is performed by a simple process. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load by the specific information discriminating means can be reduced.

In the game machine C3, an entry port into which a game ball can enter, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means based on the entry of the game ball into the entry port, and a dynamic display execution means thereof. When a game ball newly enters the ball entrance while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, the number of times the game ball newly enters up to a predetermined value. The conversion means is characterized in that the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is set to 0, and the count value of the counting means is added to the predetermined data of 1. Game machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information is dynamically displayed. When a game ball newly enters the ball entrance in the meantime, the number of times the game ball newly enters is counted by the counting means up to a predetermined value. The conversion means sets the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 to 0, and the count value of the counting means is added.

Thereby, different set values can be selected by the second selection means according to the count value of the counting means. Therefore, since various settings can be realized, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C4, the plurality of set values stored in the second storage means include at least information regarding the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, at least the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is set in the plurality of set values stored in the second storage means. Since the information about the information is included, the dynamic display can be executed in the form of the dynamic display of various identification information having different display periods. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C5, the second selection means selects from the second storage means the set value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information having a shorter display time as the count value of the counting means is larger. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being a machine to play.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the larger the counting value of the counting means, the second the set value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information having a shorter display time by the second selection means. Since it is selected from the two storage means, it is possible to prevent continuous dynamic display of the identification information having a long display time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being continuously given a large disappointment due to a long display time and a series of out-of-order productions, which improves the player's interest in the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, an information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is provided, and the first selection means is based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the predetermined data of 1 is selected from the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means, the first selection means selects the predetermined data of 1 from the first storage means.

As a result, the predetermined data can be given randomness, so that the set value selected based on the predetermined data can also be given randomness. Therefore, since the game settings are randomly determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the settings, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

<Characteristic D group> (Variation pattern table is determined based on the design and rotation speed)
A combination of a dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays identification information on a display means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a plurality of predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player when any combination of the above appears, and the dynamic display execution after the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means is completed. The dynamic display executing means includes a number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the means, and the dynamic display executing means is the number of times counted by the number counting means and the previous time by the privilege game giving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the mode of dynamically displaying the identification information is determined based on the information determined when the privileged game is given.

According to the gaming machine D1, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the identification information is dynamically displayed in advance in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. When any combination of the predetermined combinations of identification information appears, the privileged game is given to the player by the privileged game giving means. The number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means is counted by the number counting means after the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means is completed. The mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display executing means based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is given by the privilege game granting means. Will be done.

As a result, it is possible to determine a wide variety of modes of dynamic display of the identification information according to the information determined when the previous privilege game is given and the number of times counted by the number counting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine D1, the dynamic display executing means obtains the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means, specific information based on the identification information that appears when the previous privilege game is given, and the identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined based on the mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means at the time of appearance. D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the number of times counted by the number counting means, specific information based on the identification information that appeared when the previous privilege game was given, and the identification thereof. Identification because the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display execution means based on the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when the information is displayed. A wide variety of modes of dynamic display of information can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the information group composed of a plurality of information regarding the mode of dynamic display of the identification information corresponds to the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. A plurality of information constituting the information group is stored in association with the count value of the number-of-times counting means, and the dynamic display executing means is said to have the information group storage means attached and stored. One information group is selected from the information group storage means based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. The gaming machine D3, which is used for determining the mode of dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine D3, an information group composed of a plurality of pieces of information regarding the mode of dynamic display of the identification information is associated with the information determined when the previous award game is given by the award game giving means. It is stored by the information group storage means. A plurality of pieces of information constituting the information group are stored in association with the count value of the number-of-times counting means. Based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the previous award game is given by the award game giving means, the information group storage means 1 information group is generated by the dynamic display executing means. It is selected and used to determine the mode of dynamic display of the identification information.

As a result, the dynamic display execution means can determine the mode of dynamic display of the identification information only by selecting the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance. There is an effect that the processing load of the process to be determined can be reduced.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, a ball entry port through which the game ball can enter is provided, and the dynamic display execution means becomes a display means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry port. A gaming machine D4 characterized by dynamically displaying identification information.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the dynamic display executing means is based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance where the gaming ball can enter. Since the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, the player can easily trigger the dynamic display of the identification information simply by confirming whether or not the game ball has entered the ball entrance. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the game machine D4, a plurality of the entry ports are provided, and the dynamic display executing means includes the type of the entry port into which the game ball has entered and the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the mode of dynamically displaying the identification information is determined based on the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. ..

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D4, a plurality of entrances are provided, the type of the entrance for the game ball to enter, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and the privilege. Since the mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display execution means based on the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the game granting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed. A wide variety of modes can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, after the granting of the privileged game by the privileged game granting means is completed, the first gaming state or the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting either game state is provided, and the dynamic display execution means can execute the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode when the game state is the second game state. The gaming machine D6 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the awarding of the award game by the award game awarding means is completed, either the first game state or the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is played by the game state setting means. Set to state. When the gaming state is the second gaming state, the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode.

As a result, by confirming whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific mode, the player can determine whether or not the gaming state is the second gaming state. Careful observation can be made regarding the mode of dynamic display of information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D6, the dynamic display executing means can execute the dynamic display of the identification information in the specific mode when the counting value of the number counting means is a specific value. The gaming machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, when the counting value of the number-of-times counting means is a specific value, the dynamic display executing means dynamically displays the identification information in a specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode when the number-of-times counting value is a specific value. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

In the gaming machine D7, when the counting value of the number-of-times counting means is a specific value and the gaming state is the first gaming state, the dynamic display executing means is described in a mode different from the specific mode. The gaming machine D8, characterized in that it executes dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D7, when the counting value of the number-of-times counting means is a specific value and the gaming state is the first gaming state, a specific mode is determined by the dynamic display executing means. Since the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a mode different from that of the above, it is possible to suppress the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode in the first gaming state. Therefore, even though the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific mode, the player does not have a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player feels distrust of the gaming machine or the hall. It has the effect of suppressing the storage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, an information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on the establishment of a specific condition is provided, and the dynamic display execution means includes the random information acquired by the information acquisition means. , The mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined based on the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. The gaming machine D9 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the acquired random information and the number of times are counted. The mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display executing means based on the number of times counted by the means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. Therefore, it is possible to give randomness to the mode of dynamic display of the determined identification information. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in an unexpected manner of the player, so that the player On the other hand, it has the effect of giving unexpectedness.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
110 Main controller (control means)
202 ROM (first storage means, second storage means)
S611 First selection means S612 Specific information determination means S613 Conversion means S615 Second selection means, third selection means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. In such a gaming machine, whether or not to shift to the hit state is determined based on the information stored in a predetermined range of the storage means .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-276365

However, in such a gaming machine, if an erroneous value is specified in the control program due to a mistake made by the program designer or the like, there is a risk that the gaming machine may malfunction.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suppressing malfunction.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is composed of a control means for controlling the game and a plurality of addresses capable of storing data according to a predetermined control procedure, and the control means controls the game. Of the storage means that stores a plurality of data groups composed of one or a plurality of data for the purpose and the plurality of the data groups stored in the storage means, the data that constitutes one of the data groups is the control means. Data group setting means set to be used for predetermined control by, and address identification capable of specifying a predetermined address included in a range of addresses in which at least a specific data group is stored among a plurality of the data groups. The storage means includes means, and the storage means includes first specified information defined in association with the predetermined address and data number information indicating at least a part of the data constituting the specific data group. At least the second specified information defined in association with each other is stored, and the address specifying means uses the first specified information to cover the range of addresses in which the specific data group is stored. The predetermined address to be included is specified, and the data group setting means includes the predetermined address specified by the address specifying means and the data number information specified by using the second specified information. Is used to set as many data as the number of data indicated by the data number information among the data constituting the data group 1 to be used for the predetermined control .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, one or a plurality of control means for controlling a game and a plurality of addresses capable of storing data according to a predetermined control procedure for the control means to perform control. Of the storage means that stores a plurality of data groups composed of the above data and the plurality of the data groups stored in the storage means, the data that constitutes one of the data groups is subjected to predetermined control by the control means. A data group setting means for setting to be used, and an address specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined address included in a range of addresses in which at least a specific data group is stored among the plurality of the data groups are provided. The storage means is defined in association with the first specified information defined in association with the predetermined address and the data number information indicating the number of at least a part of the data constituting the specific data group. The second specified information is stored at least, and the address specifying means includes the predetermined data group included in the range of the address in which the specific data group is stored by using the first specified information. The data group setting means specifies the address, and the data group setting means uses the predetermined address specified by the address specifying means and the data number information specified by using the second specified information. Of the data constituting the data group 1, the number of data indicated by the data number information is set so as to be used for the predetermined control .

This has the effect of suppressing the malfunction of the gaming machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C3 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit setting table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 1 off-selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 2 off-selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the offset setting table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the game result setting table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the description contents of the state setting table in an actual program. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the clear table at the end of a big hit schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of various setting value storage areas schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a register schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface C. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot time setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the game result setting value acquisition processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the setting process at the time of disconnection executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image variation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table for low probability in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is the high probability in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the random number table per hour first. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the example of the description contents of the 1st random number table in the actual program in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the offset setting table of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process executed by the MPU of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the off-set setting process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a jackpot in the first hit type counter C2 and the special symbol in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship with a type typically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation type selection table in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) and (c) show the contents of the promotion period selection table in the third embodiment. It is a figure shown schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the selection table for the promotion period in the third embodiment, and (b) and (c) are the selection tables for the end of the promotion period in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the offset setting table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the variation pattern selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the selection table at the time of disengagement in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are explanatory views explaining the case where the rank-up fails in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) and (b) are explanatory views explaining the case of rank-up from rank D to rank C in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the case of rank-up from rank C to rank B in the rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram in the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case of rank-up from rank B to rank A in the rank-up effect executed after the end of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case of rank-up from rank A to rank S in the rank-up effect executed after the end of a jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) is a rank-up effect executed after the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case of notifying that the rank has been raised to the maximum rank within the rank-up period, and (b) is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case of notifying the fact that the rank up could not be up to the maximum rank within the rank up period in the rank up effect executed after the end of a big hit in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process executed by the MPU of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot time setting process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the off-set setting process 3 executed by the MPU of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation type selection table in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is the selection table for non-probability variation in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the content of the selection table for probability variation hit in the modification of the 3rd Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the selection table at the time of a detachment in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process executed by the MPU of the main control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the disconnection time setting process 4 executed by the MPU of the main control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (starting prize), which will be described later, are themes given to each stage. It is designed to be done according to. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64a, the second ball entry port 64b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64a, the second entry opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. If this is the case, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball opening 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released and the opening is repeated multiple times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are four types of jackpots for special symbols, "Big hit A" to "Big hit D". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player. Details will be described later, but for example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the game value that the normal symbol will continue to be shortened until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the jackpot ends is given. If the jackpot type is "big hit B", the game value of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot ends.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds to 30 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started. The specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64a. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64a. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64a becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 64b, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, four types of "big hit A" to "big hit D" are provided.

When it becomes a "normal jackpot", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpot), but no added value is given after the jackpot ends. That is, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state, and does not shift to the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving).

When it becomes "Big hit A (time saving big hit)", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8 rounds big hit), and after that, as an added value after the big hit, "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving middle) ). Specifically, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. In the present embodiment, the number of lottery of the special symbol defines the period during which the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, but for example, the number of times the variation of the special symbol ends may be specified.

Also, if you win "Big hit B (Probability change jackpot)", "Big hit C (Hidden probability change jackpot)", or "Big hit D (Rare latent probability change jackpot)", the number of rounds is 8 rounds in the special game state (8 rounds). It becomes a big hit), and then it shifts to a "high probability state of a special symbol" as an added value after the big hit ends. In addition, when the player wins the "big hit B (probability change jackpot)", the player is notified that the player has shifted to the "high probability state of the special symbol", but the "big hit C (latent probability change jackpot)", Or, the notification is not performed in "Big hit D (rare latent probability change big hit)". Therefore, even if it is not notified that the player has transitioned to the "high probability state of the special symbol", the player is informed of "big hit C (latent probability variable jackpot)" or "big hit D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)". You can expect that you were elected. That is, it can be expected that the state is "high probability state of special symbol".

Furthermore, when "Big hit C (latent probability variation big hit)" is won, it is selected when the content of the variable effect selected when the big hit is notified or when the deviation of the special symbol is notified after the big hit is completed. The display content of the variable pattern effect is the same as that of "Big hit A (time saving big hit)". That is, it is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether the player has won the "big hit A (short-time big hit)" or the "big hit C (latent probability variation big hit)". On the other hand, when the "big hit D (rare latent probability variation jackpot)" is won, the jackpot is notified as compared with the case where the "big hit A (time saving jackpot)" or "big hit B (latent probability variation jackpot)" is won. It is configured so that it is easy to select a variation pattern effect having a high degree of expectation when a special symbol is notified of a deviation after a big hit. Therefore, even if it is not notified that the state has shifted to the "high probability state of the special symbol", the fluctuation pattern production of the mode with high expectation is selected, and the "big hit D (rare latent probability change big hit)" is selected. It is possible to expect that the player has won the prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (big hit). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time reduction state" (normal symbol time reduction middle) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

After that, the period from the end of the big hit of the special symbol to the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, that is, from the end of "big hit A" to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. Is called the time saving period of ordinary symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases even during the probability change of the special symbol. As mentioned above, in the case of "Big hit A", the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times, but when it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, , The probability of hitting a normal symbol will remain increased until the next big hit is won. That is, when the "big hit B" to "big hit D" are won, the player can wait for the next big hit without reducing the number of balls, which is an advantageous big hit for the player. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various gaming states such as a jackpot state, a time saving state of a normal symbol, and a probability variation state of a special symbol, thereby improving the interest of the player. There is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "big hit A" is won, the time saving period of the normal symbol is set to 100 times, but the time saving period is not limited to this. For example, 20 times or 150 times may be selected as the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. Further, instead of the number of lottery of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses. In addition, instead of setting the "normal symbol time reduction state", the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the second entrance 64b can be lengthened, or the electric accessory can be hit by one normal symbol. You may open things more often. Further, the number of rounds and the closing conditions of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, and for example, a jackpot of 4 rounds or a jackpot of 16 rounds may be provided or specified. As a closing condition of the winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, for example, a condition "until 3 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won" or "until 10 seconds have passed or 5 balls have been won". You may set a jackpot with the condition "until you do". Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to either the "high probability state of the special symbol" or the "time saving state of the normal symbol", but the jackpot ends. Until the lottery of special symbols is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the system is configured to be in a "high probability state of special symbols", and after the lottery of special symbols is completed a predetermined number of times, the lottery is completed. In addition to shifting to the "low probability state of the special symbol", it may be configured to be the "time saving state of the normal symbol" or the "normal state of the normal symbol".

Further, in the present embodiment, the added value given to the player after the end of the big hit is common regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, but the game is played after the end of the big hit according to the game state when the big hit is won. The added value given to the person may be different. For example, if the "big hit A" is won during the normal state of the normal symbol, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is set to 100 times, and if the "big hit A" is won during the normal state of the normal symbol, the time reduction of the normal symbol is set. The period may be 50 times.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64a or the second entry opening 64b is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, the first ball entrance 64a, or the second ball is entered. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the mouth 64b, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the ball. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a and the ball entering the second ball entry port 64b may be held up to four times each. Further, when the fluctuation is executed according to the reserved ball, the variation may be executed in the order in which the balls are entered without considering the type of the ball entrance, and when the reserved ball exists, the second Priority may be given to entering the ball into the ball entry port 64b. Further, the jackpot winning probability and the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be changed between the first entry port 64a and the second entry opening 64b.

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (“big hit A” to “big hit D”). ) Is shown as a special symbol (first symbol).

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b (starting prize), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with this as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is any of "big hit A", "big hit C", and "big hit D", the even number "0,2,4,6,8" is added to the main symbol. A variable display is performed in which the numbers are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned. With this configuration, the jackpot type can be recognized simply by checking the aligned main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper 4/5 is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/5 is the sub-display area Ds that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b, is displayed. NS.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball enters the ball. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the sub-display area Ds. In the sub-display area Ds, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is displayed. Indicates that is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. The display is done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, as in the case of the 1st ball entrance port 64a and the 2nd ball entry port 64b. Alternatively, it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64a into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64a, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64a is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

Below the first ball entry port 64a, a second ball entry port 64b into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entry port 64b, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second entry port 64b is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, as in the case of the first entry port 64a. Since the upper side of the second ball entry port 64b is shielded by the first ball entry port 64a, it is usually difficult to allow the ball to enter the ball. As described above, by hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is opened, and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. That is, it is configured so that the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b during the probability change of the special symbol that is likely to hit the ordinary symbol or during the short period of time of the ordinary symbol.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second entry opening 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, has a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have been won, or 0.5 seconds have passed, or a ball. Will be released (until 10 wins).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated as many times as the number of times according to the jackpot type. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box will be opened. It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from a certain RAM 203, ROM 202 or RAM 203, or writing various data to RAM 203, and an interrupt circuit. Various circuits such as a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, etc. are built-in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling the processing of the main control device 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, the processing of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a third symbol display. This is the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting the display in the device 81.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. Etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C3 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C3. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball at 64a or the second entry port 64b. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entry ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 249), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 249 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 249), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 249, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 249. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, and is the first random number. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers that become big hits different in this way, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol are the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 199). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 199 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 199). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the same timing.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 249. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "7,107,240" are the first for the low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,15,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,90, 99,106,110,112,122,134,140,151,160,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,238,249 "is the first random number table for high probability. It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In the present embodiment, the random number value that becomes the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability time and the random number that becomes the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability time. Random numbers that are the jackpots for each are set so that they do not overlap with the numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. It may be easier. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit A (time saving jackpot)". The jackpot type when the value is "100 to 179" is "big hit B (probability variation jackpot)", and the jackpot type when the value is "180 to 194" is "big hit C (latent probability variation)". The jackpot type is "big hit D (rare latent probability variation jackpot)" when the value is "195-199". As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that one of four types of hit types (big hit A to big hit D) is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). Depending on the fluctuation type counter CS1, for example, "complete deviation" where reach does not occur, "short reach" where the fluctuation time is relatively short, "long reach" where the fluctuation time is relatively long, "super reach" where the fluctuation time is the longest, etc. A rough display mode is determined. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type data for determining the variation time of the symbol variation are associated with each other, and the variation type selection table 202d (FIG. 8 (a)). The variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The details will be described later, but the variable type selection table 202d includes a table that is referred to when a big hit is won (a winning selection table 202d1) and a table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery is missed. It is provided. Furthermore, there are two types of tables that are referred to when the special symbol lottery is missed. Specifically, a table (special drawing 1 removal selection table 202d2) that is referred to when the ball enters the first entry port 64a and the special symbol lottery is missed, and the ball is the second entry. There is provided a table (special drawing 2 removal selection table 202d3) that is referred to when the ball enters the mouth 64b and the lottery of the special symbol is missed. Further, as compared with the case where the variation type data is selected from the special figure 1 deviation selection table 202d2, when the variation type data is selected from the special figure 2 deviation selection table 202d3, the variation type data corresponding to the complete deviation is obtained. The selection rate is set high. With this configuration, during the probability change of the special symbol, which is in a state where it is easy to enter the second entry port 64b, and during the time saving state of the normal symbol, a short change occurs when the special symbol is not drawn. It is possible to make it easier to select the time fluctuation pattern production. By shortening the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern production, the player can feel that the period until the next jackpot is short, and the jackpot can be felt to be continuous in a short period. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The second random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C3 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C3. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C3 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 7C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C3 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C3 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is "0.2 seconds x 1 time." However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C3 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and it is attached to the second entrance 64b. Since the opening period of the electric accessory is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time-> 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b. The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C), which stores the random number value for determining whether or not the symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C3, is stored in the ROM 202. It is provided. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is "1 second x 2 times". However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C3 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register of the register 210 are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 35) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 has various settings such as a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a value storage area 203e.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , The first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b (starting winning), and the acquired values are acquired. The data is stored in order from the vacant area of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the respective values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b, and each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1 is acquired according to the starting winning. Immediately after that, apart from the big hit lottery of the original special symbol, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from each value of each of the acquired counters C1, C2, CS1. .. In this way, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1) before the original special symbol lottery is performed. Predicting the information is described as pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, as various information, whether it is right or wrong, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. Store in 223a.

Like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C3 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is the execution area. Based on the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases as the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 25).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 25 and S705 in FIG. 30). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S904 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S805 in FIG. 31).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S905 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S903: No in FIG. 32).

The various setting value storage areas 203e are storage areas in which various setting values, flags, counters, and the like for executing the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 controls based on the data stored in the various set value storage areas 203e. The various set value storage areas 203e will be described later with reference to FIG.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201 are defined in the ROM 202. The contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 14. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , The variation type selection table 202d, the offset setting table 202e, the variation pattern selection table 202f, the game result setting table 202g, the state setting table 202h, and the jackpot end clear table 202i are stored at least.

As described above, the first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter C1 is stored. When any of the random number values specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer match, it is determined as a big hit of a special symbol. NS.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 7B, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 99, the jackpot this time is "big hit A (time saving jackpot)". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 100 to 179, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit B (probability variable jackpot)". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 180 to 194, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit C (latent probability variation jackpot)", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 195 to 199. If so, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit D (rare latent probability variation jackpot)".

After the end of the big hit, the random value that becomes the big hit that shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol is set to 100 of 0 to 99. On the other hand, the number of random numbers for the jackpot (big hit B to jackpot D) that shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is set to 100 from 100 to 199. That is, the ratio of the jackpot that shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot and the jackpot that shifts to the low-probability state of the special symbol is 1: 1. In addition, among the jackpots that shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol, the random value that becomes the jackpot (big hit C, jackpot D) that the player is not notified of the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol is 180 to 199. It is set to 20 pieces. That is, it is configured so that the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is not notified once every five times when the jackpot that shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol is won. As a result, even if it is not notified that the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, the player is transitioned to the special symbol high probability state (that is, the jackpot C or the jackpot D. You can continue the game while expecting (winning).

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 7C, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), when the value of the random number counter C3 for the second hit is in the range of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened "1 second x 2 times".

The variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is a data table in which the correspondence between the variation type data for determining the rough display mode of the variation pattern and the variation type counter CS1 is defined. In the variable type selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol and the type of the ball entry port into which the ball has entered are defined. The variation type data selected from the variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is converted into an offset value (pattern selection offset value) based on the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10) described later. Then, the content defined in the address that is offset by the offset value from the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set as the variation pattern type.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the variation type selection table 202d includes a hit selection table 202d1, a special figure 1 deviation selection table 202d2, and a special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3. There is. The winning selection table 202d1 is a table for selecting variable type data when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the special symbol 1 removal selection table 202d2 is used when the special symbol lottery (the special symbol 1 lottery) performed based on the ball entering the first entry port 64a is missed. It is a table for selecting variable type data, and the special figure 2 off selection table 202d3 is a lottery of special symbols (special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entry port 64b. This is a table for selecting variable type data when the lottery) is out of order.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8B to 11, the flow from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) to the selection of the variation pattern type will be specifically described.

FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a hit selection table 202d1 for selecting variation type data based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 when it is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol. As shown in FIG. 8B, there are three types of fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the case of a big hit of a special symbol: "hit short reach", "hit long reach", and "hit super reach". On the other hand, the variation type data 00H, 01H, and 02H are associated with each other. Then, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H (per short reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if the value is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H (per long reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data. If it is selected and is in the range of 180 to 199, 02H (per super reach) is selected as the variation type data. These fluctuation type data are converted into a pattern selection offset value which is a value used for selecting the fluctuation pattern type by the offset setting table 202e described later, and the fluctuation pattern selection table described later is based on the fluctuation pattern selection offset value. The fluctuation pattern type is selected from 202f.

FIG. 9A shows variable type data when the special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is out of order. It is a figure which showed the special figure 1 deviation selection table 202d2 for selection. As shown in FIG. 9A, the modes of the variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is out of order are "completely out of order", "out of short reach", "out of long reach", and "out of supermarket". There are four types of "reach", and variable type data 03H, 04H, 05H, and 06H are associated with these, respectively.

If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 164, 03H (complete deviation) is selected as the variation type data, and if the value is in the range of 165 to 184, 04H (out of short reach) is selected as the variation type data. If it is in the range of 185 to 194, 05H is selected as the variation type data, and if it is in the range of 195 to 199, 06H is selected as the variation type data. These fluctuation type data are also converted into pattern selection offset values using the offset setting table 202e and used to select the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, as in the case of the jackpot.

FIG. 9B shows variable type data when the lottery for special symbols (lottery for special symbols 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entry port 64b is out of order. It is a figure which showed the special figure 2 deviation selection table 202d3 for selection. As shown in FIG. 9B, the modes of the variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is out of order are "completely out of order", "out of short reach", "out of long reach", and "out of supermarket". There are four types of "reach", and variable type data 07H, 08H, 09H, and 0AH are associated with each of these.

If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 184, 07H (complete deviation) is selected as the variation type data. That is, it is set so that the rate at which complete deviation is selected is higher than when the ball enters the first entry port 64a. Further, if it is in the range of 185 to 194, 08H (outside short reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data, if it is in the range of 195 to 198, 09H is selected as the fluctuation type data, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 199. If there is, 0AH is selected as the variation type data. That is, the ratios of the out-of-field short reach, the out-of-order long reach, and the out-of-order super reach are set lower than when the ball enters the first entry port 64a. By increasing the ratio of complete deviation and decreasing the ratio of various deviation reach, it becomes easier to select the fluctuation pattern production with a short fluctuation time in the high probability state of the special symbol or the time reduction state of the normal symbol, so until the next big hit. It is possible to shorten the period of the game, and give the player the impression that the jackpots are continuous in a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. It should be noted that the variation type data selected from the special figure 2 deviation selection table 202d3 also uses the offset setting table 202e to select a pattern, as in the case of a big hit or when the ball enters the first entry port 64a. It is converted into an offset value and used to select the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an offset setting table 202e referred to for determining a pattern selection offset value for selecting a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the variation type data values selected from the variation type selection table 202d are 00H, 01H, 02H, 00H, 01H, 02H are set as the pattern selection offset values from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), respectively. Be selected. On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 03H (complete deviation at the first ball entry port 64a), the pattern selection offset value selected is configured to change according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 03H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 04H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 05H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 06H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. By changing the selected pattern selection offset value according to the number of reserved balls, the selected variable pattern type can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the larger the number of reserved balls, the shorter the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern type is selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress that only the deviation patterns having a long fluctuation period are continuous, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game.

The process of specifying the fluctuation pattern type based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is performed when the data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area. In this case, the winning data stored in the other holding areas is packed in the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller by the shift process, so the pattern selection offset value is selected. The maximum value of the winning data (number of reserved balls) held at the timing is 3. Therefore, the offset value setting table 202e defines the case where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 3.

When the variation type data value selected from the variation type selection table 202d is 04H (off short reach at the first entry port 64a), 07H is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). NS. On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 05H (long reach out of the first ball opening 64a), the pattern selection offset selected according to the number of reserved balls is the same as in the case of complete deviation. The value changes. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 08H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 09H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 0BH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. As a result, as in the case of complete deviation, it is possible to suppress that only the fluctuation patterns of deviation having a long fluctuation period are continuous, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game. can.

When the variation type data value selected from the variation type selection table 202d is 06H (disengagement super reach at the first entry port 64a), 0CH is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). NS. On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 07H (complete deviation at the second entry port 64b), the pattern selection offset value selected changes according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 0DH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 0EH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0FH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. As a result, it is possible to suppress that only the deviation patterns having a long fluctuation period are continuous, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game.

When the variation type data values selected from the variation type selection table 202d are 08H, 09H, and 0AH, 11H, 12H, and 13H are selected as the pattern selection offset values from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), respectively. As described above, the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10) is used to select the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting a variation pattern type based on the pattern selection offset value. The variation pattern selection table 202f is a data table assigned to the range of addresses 1AF5H to 1B08H of the ROM 202, and one variation pattern type is defined for each address. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, "hit super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, "complete deviation B (special figure 1)" with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds, and "disengagement" with a fluctuation time of 19 seconds. "Long reach B (Special Figure 1)" and "Complete deviation D (Special Figure 2)" with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds are specified. Note that FIG. 1 shows the variation based on the ball entering the first entry port 64a, and FIG. 2 shows the variation based on the ball entering the second entry port 64b.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern type when executing the fluctuation is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f and the pattern selection offset value. Specifically, with respect to 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, the variation pattern type defined in the address ahead by the selected pattern selection offset value is determined as the current variation pattern type. It is configured as follows.

For example, when the special symbol is a big hit and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 100, 01H is selected as the variation type data from the hit selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 8B). 01H is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data value and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the variation pattern type this time, the data defined in 1AF6H, which is the address obtained by adding the pattern selection offset value 01H to 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, a "hit long reach" with a fluctuation period of 20 seconds is selected.

Further, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is out of order, the value of the variation type counter is 190, and the number of reserved balls is 2. In, 05H is selected as the variation type data from the selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 9A) for removing the special figure 1. Then, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data, the number of reserved balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the variation pattern type this time, the data specified in 1AFFH, which is the address obtained by adding the pattern selection offset value 0AH to 1AF5, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, "off long reach C (Special Figure 1)" with a fluctuation time of 17 seconds is selected.

Further, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second entry port 64b is out of order, the value of the variation type counter is 20, and the number of reserved balls is 3. 07H is selected as the variation type data from the special figure 2 deviation selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 9B). Then, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data, the number of reserved balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the variation pattern type this time, the data defined in 1B05H, which is the address obtained by adding the pattern selection offset value 10H to 1AF5, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, "complete deviation D (special figure 2)" having a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the variation type counter value CS1, the type of the entry port into which the ball has entered, and the number of reserved balls. It is configured to select. Further, when the entry port where the ball enters is the second entry port 64b, it is easy to select the variation pattern effect of a shorter fluctuation period as compared with the case where the ball enters the first entry opening 64a. It is configured. That is, it is possible to easily select a variation pattern effect having a short variation time during the probability variation of the special symbol, which is a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b, and during the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can feel that the period until the next big hit is short, and the big hit can be made to feel continuous in a short period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the larger the number of reserved balls, the easier it is to select the fluctuation pattern type having a shorter fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress that only the deviation patterns having a long fluctuation period are continuous, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the fluctuation type data value is the same, different fluctuation times are selected according to the number of reserved balls, and the same fluctuation time is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. There is a gap, but it is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation time may be different depending on the number of reserved balls in all the deviations. In addition, if the lottery for the special symbol 1 is missed, only the misses for which the same fluctuation time is selected are selected regardless of the number of reserved balls, and the lottery for the special symbol 2 is missed. May be configured in which only the outliers in which different fluctuation times are selected according to the number of reserved balls are selected. As a result, it is possible to easily select a variation pattern effect having a short variation time during the probability variation of the special symbol, which is a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 64b, and during the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can feel that the period until the next big hit is short, and the big hit can be made to feel continuous in a short period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to select the fluctuation pattern type according to the number of reserved balls, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the fluctuation type data using the offset setting table 202e. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variable type data with the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the variable type counter value is set in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting to an offset value. Therefore, one of the most important processes in the game, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern effect, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of ROM 202 will be continued. In the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12), when a big hit is won, the setting values such as the setting of the stop symbol indicating the big hit and the operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a during the big hit are set as the big hit type. It is a data table specified for each. The game result setting table 202g will be described with reference to FIG.

The game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12) is stored in the range of the addresses "19D1H" to "19E8H" of the ROM 202, and 1 byte of data is stored in each address. In this game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12), the number of judgment values (random value values) (number of judgment values) for each jackpot type, the lighting patterns (number of display symbols) of a plurality of LEDs 37a, and special symbols are displayed. Information indicating the stop symbol (stop symbol information), the operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (large opening opening pattern), and information for determining the game state after the jackpot is completed (offset value). Is stipulated. In FIG. 12, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is shown in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address is omitted and only the lower byte is shown.

In the pachinko machine 10, based on winning the jackpot, the above setting values according to the winning jackpot type are stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e (FIG. 12) of the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12). 15). Details of the various set value storage areas 203e will be described later. Then, based on the set values stored in the various set value storage areas 203e, the MPU 201 performs various controls related to the variable pattern effect that becomes a big hit and the big hit. Further, in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15), in addition to the storage area for storing the setting values related to the game, the offset value defined in the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12) is stored. Offset value storage area is provided. This offset value is a value used to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

Specifically, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 37) that is executed when it is determined that the jackpot end timing is set, various setting values related to the game state after the jackpot end (whether or not the special symbol is set to the high probability state). It is used to select the setting value indicating the above, the time saving period of the normal symbol, etc.) from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A) and set it in the various setting value storage areas 203e. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random value (counter value) itself acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b (starting winning) is the end of the jackpot. It keeps holding until the time point, and the game state after the end of the big hit is not determined based on the random number value (counter value), and the ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b ( Only the offset value selected based on the random number value (counter value) acquired with the start winning) is held in the jackpot.

Here, if the random number value that becomes the jackpot is held during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of winning the jackpot or during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read by the fraudulent player, and the jackpot becomes a jackpot. The timing at which the random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a risk that a jackpot may be illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into an offset value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the offset value. Therefore, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself, which is the jackpot of the special symbol, is held for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment holds various set values related to the game state after the end of the jackpot (set values indicating whether or not the special symbol is set to the high probability state, the time saving period of the normal symbol, etc.). Instead, only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202h, is stored. Since it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the offset value instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all the various set values in the RAM 203, the storage area of the RAM 203 should be used efficiently. Can be done.

Next, the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. This state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A) is a table in which the gaming states that can be transferred after the end of the jackpot are defined in the order of offset values, and is executed when it is determined that the end timing of the jackpot is reached. It is a data table referred to for setting a game state after the end of a big hit in the big hit end process (see FIG. 37).

The state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD8H to 1AE3H of the ROM 202, and 1 byte of data is stored in each address. In this state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A), information indicating whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (lottery state of the special symbol) and the time reduction of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot are shown. Information indicating whether or not to shift to the state (state of the normal symbol), the time reduction period of the normal symbol given after the jackpot ends (number of time reductions), and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern are provided. The number of lottery of special symbols (number of times of switching the variable pattern selection table) required to switch from the table for after the jackpot to the table according to the state is stipulated. Further, in FIG. 8, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is shown in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is shown.

Subsequently, the description contents of the state setting table 202h in the program will be described with reference to FIG. 13B. FIG. 13B is a simplified diagram showing an example of the description contents of the state setting table 202h of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The left side of FIG. 13B is an example of the description content, and the right side shows the meaning of the description. As shown in FIG. 13B, first, a label "TBL1" is defined as a table name indicating the state setting table 202h. By defining the label name, the start address of the state setting table 202h can be read out by simply describing "TBL1" in other processing. That is, it is not necessary to input the address value itself of the state setting table 202h in other processing. In particular, if the model is changed, the control processing and the number of data stored in the ROM 202 may change. Therefore, when the program used in the pachinko machine 10 is diverted to another game machine, the state setting table 202h is used. The assigned address value may also change. Even in such a case, if the start address of the state setting table 202h is associated with the label "TBL1", the address in each process of reading the state setting table 202h when the program is diverted to another model. There is no need to retype. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a mistake in typing the program when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the mistake in the program.

In the line following the line in which the label is specified, among the data for specifying in the state setting table 202h, the data corresponding to the offset value 00H is described in the order of the stored addresses. Specifically, the data for specifying the address 1AD8H is 00H, the data for specifying the address 1AD9H is 00H, the data for specifying the address 1ADAH is 64H, and the data is specified for the address 1AD9H. A certain 64H is described in one line. The data corresponding to the offset value 01H and the data corresponding to the offset value 02H are also described in one line in the same manner. That is, in one process of reading data from the state setting table 202h and setting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a series of continuously read data is described in one line. By describing the data corresponding to each offset value on one line in this way, there is no omission or duplication in the data corresponding to each offset value (the number of data corresponding to each offset value becomes equal). The designer can easily confirm whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to omission or duplication when defining data.

Further, in the program, the number of data corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h is set in the row between the row in which the data corresponding to the offset value 00H and the row in which the data corresponding to the offset value 01H is specified. , The label "D_SIZE" is defined. By definition, "EQU" means equal and "$" means the current position (the address next to the last data corresponding to the offset value 00H). That is, it is defined that "D_SIZE" is the difference between the next address at the end of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H and "TBL1" (the start address of the state setting table 202h). In the present embodiment, the start address of the state setting table 202h is 1AD8H, and the end address of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H is 1ADBH. Therefore, "D_SIZE" is 0004H, which is the difference between 1ADCH and 1AD8H. ..

By defining the label "D_SIZE" as the number of data in this way, when the number of data in the state setting table 202h is used in other processing, it is sufficient to describe only "D_SIZE". That is, it is not necessary to specify the number of data itself in other processing. In particular, if the model is changed, the number of data specified in the state setting table 202h may change. Even in such a case, if the label "D_SIZE" is defined as the number of data, the number of data is rewritten in each process using the number of data in the state setting table 202h when the program is diverted to another model. No need. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a mistake in typing the program when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the mistake in the program.

Further, in the present embodiment, the label "D_SIZE" indicating the number of data is not defined by the direct value of the number of data, but is defined by using the label "TBL1". As a result, it is not necessary to rewrite the definition of "D_SIZE" even when the program is diverted to another model having a different number of data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning because it is possible to prevent a mistake in rewriting the definition of "D_SIZE" when the program is diverted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, "TBL1" is defined as a label only at the start address of the state setting table 202h, but for each offset value (for each series of data continuously read in one process). , It may be configured to define a separate label for the start address. For example, the label "TBL2" is associated with the start address (1ADCH) of the data corresponding to the offset value 01H, and the label "TBL3" is associated with the start address (1AE0H) of the data corresponding to the offset value 02H. May be good. Further, in this case, the definition of "D_SIZE" may be defined by the difference between "TBL2" and "TBL1", or may be defined by the difference between "TBL3" and "TBL2". Further, it may be defined as a value obtained by dividing the difference between "TBL3" and "TBL1" by 2.

Further, the name of each label ("TBL1", "D_SIZE", etc.) is not limited to the name of the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. This is because the label name does not affect the operation of the actual machine. More specifically, in the process of translating (assembling) the created program into a language (machine language) that MPU201 can understand, all the labels that appear in each process are converted into the values of the address and the number of data itself. .. That is, at the stage when the program is reflected on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, all the various labels are replaced with hexadecimal machine language. Therefore, the name of the label does not affect the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at all.

Further, the program description method for defining the address and the number of data in association with the label is not limited to the state setting table 202h, and may be referred to in other processing such as the game result setting table 202g. The same description method may be followed for all data tables.

Next, the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. The clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot is a table stored in the range of the addresses "1205H" to "1212H" of the ROM 202, and the addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15) are defined for each address. There is. The details will be described later, but in the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), which is one of the jackpot end processes, the data stored in the order of the addresses from the jackpot end clear table 202i to the ROM 202 is stored by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. "00H" (initial value data) is set as a set value at the address indicated by the read and read stored data (address data). If the data read from the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot is "00H", the zero setting process is terminated. Since only the setting destination address is specified in the jackpot end clear table 202i and the process of setting "00H" to the setting destination address is specified in the control program of MPU201, the jackpot end clear table 202i is specified. The amount of data can be reduced.

Next, various set value storage areas 203e provided in the RAM 203 will be described. FIG. 15 is a schematic view schematically showing the various set value storage areas 203e. As shown in FIG. 15, the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15) correspond to the range of the addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. In the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15), the firing control signal setting value storage area assigned to the address “F000H” of the RAM 203 is a storage in which the setting values for controlling the firing of the sphere are stored. It is an area, and the firing of the ball into the game area is controlled based on the set value stored in this area.

The display LED setting area assigned to the address "F009H" of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which the setting value of the lighting pattern for lighting the display LED is stored, and is based on the setting value stored in this area. And turn on the display LED.

The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2 assigned to the addresses "F01DH" and "F01EH", respectively, are storage areas for storing setting values for outputting various test signals. Examples of the test signal include a signal for performing an operation test of the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a, a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit, and the like. Since it is a test signal, the signal is not output while the player is playing the game on the pachinko machine 10 (that is, "00H" is set as a set value in both the test signal setting areas 1 and 2).

The maximum number of rounds setting area assigned to the address "F030H" is an area for setting the number of jackpot rounds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all jackpots are jackpots with 8 rounds, so if the jackpot is won, "08H" is set as a set value.

The game state setting area assigned to the address "F035H" of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which a setting value indicating the current game state is stored. For example, if the stored setting value is "01H". , The special symbol is changing, if it is "02H", it indicates that the special symbol is being confirmed, and if it is "03H", it is a big hit and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed. It indicates that it is in a state, and if it is "04H", it indicates that the jackpot is in progress and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is in the open state. If it is "00H", the state other than the above (that is, the state from the end of the jackpot to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, or the state where there is no reserved ball, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. (A state in which a certain period of time has passed since then) is shown.

The jackpot flag assigned to the address "F090H" is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot state (special game state) is currently in progress, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is "01H"). If (if), it indicates that the special symbol is in the jackpot, and if it is off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), it is in a state other than the special symbol's jackpot (that is, the special symbol). (Fluctuating state, demo state, etc.). The storage area allocated to the subsequent addresses "F091H" to "F094H" is an area for setting the data read from the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202.

First, the probability change state flag assigned to the address "F091H" is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is currently undergoing probability change, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is "01H"". If (if), it indicates that the special symbol is in the probabilistic change, and if it is off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. ..

Further, the time saving state flag assigned to the address "F092H" indicates whether or not the time saving of the normal symbol is in progress, and is a set value for designating a table for selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation. Is stored. If the flag is "00H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and if the flag is "01H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the time saving state 1.

The time-saving state counter assigned to the address "F093H" shifts to the low-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and when the time-saving state of the normal symbol shifts, the number of time-saving times of the normal symbol remains. It is a counter that indicates whether or not it is. If the game shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time saving state counter is 0 regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol. be. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the probability change state flag is on or the value of the time reduction state counter is 1 or more, the control of the time reduction state of the normal symbol is executed.

The variation selection state counter assigned to the address "F094H" is a counter indicating the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the table for selecting the variation pattern effect is switched to another table. If this counter is 1 or more, a dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table after the end of the jackpot is selected as a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation. On the other hand, when the value of the fluctuation selection state counter is 0, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the table corresponding to the game state indicated by the time saving state flag.

The offset value storage area assigned to the address "F095H" is a storage area for storing the offset value, and the set value after the end of the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202h based on the stored offset value. , The addresses of the RAM 203 are set to "F091H" to "F094H", respectively. This offset value is read from the game result setting table 202g and stored in the offset value storage area when it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery. Further, in the reading of the set value from the state setting table 202h and the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) executed after the setting is completed, the initial value "00H" is overwritten.

The large opening setting area assigned to the address "F096H" is a storage area in which a set value indicating an opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a during the big hit is stored, and is stored during the big hit (that is, that is). Referenced (when the jackpot flag is on). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all jackpot types are jackpots of 8 rounds, and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is common, so a common setting value is set.

The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address "F097H" is an area for setting information on the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a stop symbol code indicating the stop symbol corresponding to the omission is set, and if the lottery result is a win, the stop symbol code according to the jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e. It is issued and set. Then, at the end of the change of the special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the set value set in the stop symbol code information storage area is confirmed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

The addresses "F09FH" to "F0FFH" are unused areas, and the data stored in these areas is fixed to "00H". In the various setting value storage areas 203e, various setting values are assigned to addresses other than those described above. Although the explanation is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter that counts the number of balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and the time for switching the display of the ordinary symbol in the fluctuation production of the ordinary symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to intensively store various setting values, counters, timers, etc. in the various setting value storage areas 203e in which the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. A ring buffer for storing commands to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like (for example, a fluctuation pattern command, a stop type command, etc.), a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball number storage area 203b, a stack area. For example, the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is configured to be stored in an address other than "F0H" (for example, an address in which the upper byte is "F1H").

Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The register 210 is for temporarily storing the address data and the set value data and performing arithmetic processing on the stored set value when reading data from the ROM 202 or the RAM 203 or writing the set value to the RAM 203. Is. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of executing arithmetic processing on the stored data and a general-purpose register 210b1,210b2,210c1,210c2,210d1,210d2 capable of storing address data and setting value data. A flag register 210e for storing various flags and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e as a fixed value are provided. The accumulator 210a can also be used to temporarily store data in the same manner as the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2.

Each register provided in the register 210 is configured to be able to hold 1 byte of data. Further, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2, the general-purpose register 210c1 and the general-purpose register 210c2, and the general-purpose register 210d1 and the general-purpose register 210d2 can be used as a pair, respectively. That is, it is configured so that a total of 2 bytes of data can be stored in the registers of each pair. The data for 2 bytes corresponds to, for example, the address data of the ROM 202, the address data of the RAM 203, and the like.

The flag register 210e is provided with a different flag for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flags are, for example, the zero flag that turns off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero and turns on if it is zero, and the data stored in any of the various general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. If the data is other than "00H", the load flag is turned off, and if the data is "00H", the load flag is turned on.

The control when reading and writing data will be described below. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various commands for executing various controls of the main control device 110, and data reading / writing can also be performed by issuing one of the various commands. Performed using. Specifically, for example, a transfer instruction for designating a read source and a setting destination and transferring the data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination is prepared.

In this transfer instruction, at least one of the read source and the setting destination needs to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or one of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose register 210b1 to general-purpose register 210d2). be. Therefore, for example, when reading the data specified in the address "1ADAH" of the ROM 202 and storing the read data in the address "F093H" of the RAM 203, it is necessary to transfer the data via, for example, the general-purpose register 210b1. Specifically, first, the address "1ADAH" is read from, the general-purpose register 210b1 is set as the setting destination, and the data defined at the address "1ADAH" is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 by using a transfer instruction. Then, next, the general-purpose register 210b1 is set as the read source, the address "F093H" is set as the setting destination, and the transfer instruction is issued again to set the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to the address "F093H". By controlling in this way, the data defined in the address "1ADAH" of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address "F093H" of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a that defines a plurality of modes of variation pattern effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received, the mode of the corresponding variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. Further, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start prize is won in the main control device 110, from each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired according to the start prize. , Various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b, or in the main control device 110, it is special. When the fluctuation display in the symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the set stop type is used for display. The stop type command notifies the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and so on. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being too late.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 64b is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 43).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 18, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to be used as the power-on main image shown in FIG. 18A. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 18 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 17 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64a or the second entrance ball 64b is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C alternate. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. 19 and 20 are explanatory views for explaining the three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 19A is shown in FIG. 19 (b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 20 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. They are shown below.

Of the back surfaces A to C, as shown in FIG. 19, the rear image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B is a character whose image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "city stage" or the "empty stage", the MPU 231 initially positions the display area between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, the rear image on the back surface C has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 20 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (a), an orange sky indicating a sunrise is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 20 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of. Further, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b) excluding FIG. 20 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes the resident video RAM 235 very much. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'or the range of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b). It is fixed, and the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. Can be displayed while. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to 20 (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, FIG. 20 (a). ) To (b) are set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to (c) and 20 (c) to (a) is normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to (c) and 20 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

On the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 controls the voice lamp. When the character symbol is changed based on the content of the command received from the device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read from the character ROM 234, but the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. Is read, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the demo production is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is one of the big hits. If there is, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop.

The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started, and as described above, the demo effect starts even after a predetermined time has passed since the one variable effect stopped. This is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect accompanying the winning is not started, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped. As it is displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect and one display data table corresponding to the demo effect are stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. Similarly, in the pseudo-variation data table, which is a display data table for the effect during the jackpot state, a number of tables corresponding to the set variation effect pattern are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 22).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, in the example of FIG. 21). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 43) (see S2405 in FIG. 43). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 53 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2701 in FIG. 45B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) see S2709) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 46 to 49) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 53 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 53 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing the image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 45 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 50) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 starts an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 50). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3513 in FIG. 54). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 54). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 55).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 55).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 38. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (249 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C3 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per random number counter C3 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 249, 199, 199, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, CS1 and C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64a or the second entry 64b (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, a jackpot determination process is executed in which a lottery is performed based on the data shifted to the execution area to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot (S208). The jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 (according to the fluctuation pattern command). If this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the jackpot setting process (S308), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, or the missed time setting process (S309), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S211: Yes), the start of the jackpot according to the jackpot type is set (S212).

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various set value storage areas 203e is 1 or more (S213). If the value of the time saving state counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving state counter is subtracted by 1 (S214), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving state counter is 0 (S213: No), the processing of S214 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process (S208). This jackpot determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, the lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the fluctuations performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the effect.

In the jackpot determination process, first, the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability is selected from the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot. It is set as a table to be used (S301). After that, the probability change state flag stored in the various set value storage areas 203e is read out (S302), and it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag is in a state indicating a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

As a result of the processing of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S303: Yes), the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 is used to display the first random number table 202a2 for high probability. As a table for reading (not shown) and determining whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol, a new setting is made instead of the first random number table 202a1 for low probability (S304), and the process proceeds to S305. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high probability state (that is, the special symbol is in the low probability state) as a result of the processing of S303 (S303: No), the processing of S304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S305. do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first random number counter C1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), and the read value of the first random number counter C1 and S
Compare with the table (comparison source table) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit set in the process of 301 or S304 (S306).

As described above, in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability, three random numbers "7,107,240" are set as big hits of special symbols. In the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, as random number values that are big hits of special symbols, "4,11,15,28,38,45,52,64,78,83, 30 pieces of "90,99,106,110,112,122,134,140,151,160,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,238,249" are set. In the process of S306, among these tables, the random number value defined in the table set as the comparison source table and the value of the random number counter C1 per first are compared one by one.

Based on this comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any of the random number values specified in the comparison source table (S307), and the matching random number value is determined. If there is (that is, in the case of a big hit of a special symbol), the big hit setting process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit and the control during the big hit is executed (S308), and the process shifts to the process of S310. do. On the other hand, when there is no matching random number value in the processing of S307 (that is, in the case of deviation of the special symbol), the deviation time setting processing for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is executed (S309). The process proceeds to S310. The details of the jackpot setting process (S308) and the loss setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29.

Next, in the process of S310, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process is terminated. Since various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even in the case of a big hit, it is possible to clear the random value (counter value) that becomes the big hit before the big hit state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside. It can be suppressed. Specifically, the analysis timing is set on the so-called hanging board, the random number is acquired at the timing when the random number value that becomes the jackpot appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling so as to judge the success or failure of the jackpot is suppressed. Can be done. In the present embodiment, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is in a jackpot state. It should be cleared before it is recognized that. Therefore, for example, a process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during the fluctuation effect or before the symbol is stopped.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state, the first random number table for the low probability time is temporarily set in the processing of S301 at an early stage. This is to set up a table for comparison. That is, when none of the first random number tables (first random number table 202a1 for low probability or first random number table 202a2 for high probability) is set, the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a problem that the processing of S303 or S304, which is the processing in the middle, is skipped due to the above, the big hit is based on the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability time set at the beginning of the big hit judgment processing. Whether it is right or wrong can be determined.

Next, the jackpot setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As described above, this jackpot setting process is a process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot.

In this process, first, the jackpot flag of the various setting value storage areas 203e is set to on (S401), and then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot of the jackpot won this time is read. The type is specified (S402). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is specified based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B). For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80", the counter value is in the range of "0" to "99", so the jackpot type this time is specified as jackpot A (time saving jackpot). .. Further, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "190", the counter value is in the range of "180" to "194", so the jackpot type this time is jackpot C (latent probability variation jackpot). Be identified.

Next, the set value corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202h of the ROM 202, and the read set value is set in the corresponding storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 (S403). The process proceeds to S404. Here, as the setting values to be read from the game result setting table 202h and set in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the lighting pattern of the LED 37a (the number of displayed symbols), the information indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol (stop symbol code), and the like. , The control pattern (large opening pattern) of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the like can be mentioned.

As described above, when the set value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the data of the transfer source address and the data of the set destination address are stored in one of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Temporarily store. Then, the set value data read from the ROM 202 based on the stored transfer source address data is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers in which the address data is not stored, and then the set destination address. The set value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data of. In the process of S403, the transfer control via the register 210 is repeated for the number of set value data to be transferred.

In the processing of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random number value (counter value), and in the processing of S403, various set values are determined based on the specified jackpot type, but the range of the random number value (counter value) And various set values may be directly associated with each other and specified. That is, a table in which the range of the random number value (counter value) and the corresponding various setting values are defined may be provided in the ROM 202, and the setting value may be directly specified from the random number value by referring to this table. ..

In the process of S404, the variation type data is selected by reading the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and comparing it with the hit selection table 202d1 of the variation type selection table 202d (S404). For example, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "10", "01H", which is a value corresponding to the winning long reach, is selected as the fluctuation type data. If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "190", "02H", which is a value corresponding to the winning super reach, is selected as the fluctuation type data.

Next, the pattern selection offset value is determined by comparing the selected variation type data with the offset setting table 202e (S405). Specifically, if the selected variation type data is "00H", "00H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value, and if the variation type data is "01H", "01H" is the pattern selection offset value. If the variation type data is "02H", "02H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value.

Then, based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the fluctuation pattern type is specified from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type defined in the address 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, by the amount of the pattern selection offset value is specified as the variation pattern type in the current symbol variation. do. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is "01H", the "hit long reach" defined in 1A6FH, which is the address 1A6FH ahead of the address 1AF5H by "01H", is specified as the current variation type.

Then, the variation pattern command based on the specified variation pattern type is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S407). The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201.

After setting the fluctuation pattern, at the end of the jackpot, the game result setting value acquisition process, which is the process for acquiring and setting the offset information, which is the information for setting the game state after the jackpot ends, is executed (S408). , End this process.

Subsequently, the game result set value acquisition process (S408) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The game result set value acquisition process (S408) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a process for holding the offset value based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the RAM 203.

In the game result setting value acquisition process (S408), first, the offset value based on the current jackpot type is read out from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12B) (S501). For example, if the jackpot type this time is jackpot C, "02H" is read as an offset value. Then, the read offset value is stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e (S502), and this process is terminated.

The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e in the process of S502 is held until the end timing of the jackpot, and is a process for setting the state after the end of the jackpot (FIG. 37). (See), it is used to determine the data to be read from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). In this way, the random value (counter value) acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64a or the second entry opening 64b (starting winning) is converted into an offset value and the offset value storage area. Since it is configured to store in and set the game state after the jackpot ends based on the offset value, the period in which the random number value itself, which is the jackpot of the special symbol, is held is limited to a short period of time. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random value, which is the jackpot of the special symbol, from being illegally obtained from the outside.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, in the jackpot determination process (S208), when it is determined that the lottery result is out of the special symbol, the deviation pattern setting process is executed to set the mode of the variation pattern. (S309) will be described.

In the off-set setting process, first, the special drawing 1 deviation selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 9A) or the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3 (FIG. 9B) defined in the variation type selection table 202d. (See), the table corresponding to the entry port where the ball has entered is read out, and the variation type data value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S601). Here, the table corresponding to the entry port into which the ball has entered is the selection table 202d2 for removing the special figure 1 if the entry port into which the ball has entered is the first entry port 64a (FIG. 9 (a). ), And if the entry port into which the ball has entered is the second entry opening 64b, the selection table 202d3 for removing special drawing 2 (see FIG. 9B).

After the processing of S601 is completed, the pattern selection offset value is set to the offset setting table 202e based on the selected variable type data value and the current number of reserved balls (that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c). (See FIG. 10) to select from (S602). For example, if the value of the variation type data is "03H" and the number of reserved balls is "2", "05H" is selected as the pattern selection offset value. If the value of the variation type data is "09H", "12H" is selected as the pattern selection offset value regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Then, based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the fluctuation pattern type is specified from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type defined in the address 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, by the amount of the pattern selection offset value is specified as the variation pattern type in the current symbol variation. do. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is "05H", the "complete deviation C (special figure 1)" specified in the address 1AFAH, which is "05H" ahead of the address 1AF5H, is selected. That is, the mode of deviation in which the reach of the fluctuation time of 6 seconds does not occur is determined as the fluctuation pattern type. Further, for example, if the pattern selection offset value is "12H", the "off long reach (special figure 2)" defined in the address 1B07H, which is "12H" ahead of the address 1AF5H, is selected. That is, the mode of deviation accompanied by the reach of the fluctuation time of 17 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern type.

Next, the variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern type is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S604), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b. , This is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various random number counters when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding of the variation display in the special symbol). The number of times N) is acquired (S702), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

Then, there is no prize in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b (S701: No), or there is a prize in the first ball opening 64a or the second ball opening 64b. If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64a or the second ball slot 64b (S701: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added by 1 (S704). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S705).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S705, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is changed. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S706, the winning / failing of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not) in the special symbol, the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S707). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depends on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S606 and the random number value (hit value) stored in the first random number table 202a. Judgment is made by comparing one. As described above, the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol at the low probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability of the special symbol, 3 of "7,107,240". The random number value, which is an individual number and is a big hit of the special symbol at the time of high probability, is stored in the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability, "4,11,15,28,38,45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231,238, 249 "30" It is an individual.

Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation state flags stored in the various set value storage areas 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation state flag is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation state flag is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the processing of S707, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation state flag, and when these values match, it is special. Judge that it is a big hit of the symbol.

Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S706 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table. It is determined which of the four types of special symbol jackpots (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is the jackpot type. As described above, the jackpot type is specified by comparing the value of the first hit type counter C2 with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is completely out of alignment based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the process of S706. It is determined whether there is a short reach, a long reach, or a super reach. As described above, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of deviation is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) by converting the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 into a pattern selection offset value and based on the pattern selection offset value. ..

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S707, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and the predicted stopping type are determined. A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S708), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24).

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is performed. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S804), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S804: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S805).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S808). Specifically, if the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability change state flag is on, it is determined that the time saving state is a normal symbol. ..

In the process of S808, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S808: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S809). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S809: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, it is difficult to hit the normal symbol. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the second entering opening 64b is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 64b as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64a, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entry opening 64b during the jackpot of the special symbol, but the first entry. Many balls enter the ball mouth 64a. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64a becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S809, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S809: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C3 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S810). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C3 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 7 (c)).

In the process of S808, if it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S808: No), the process proceeds to the process of S811. In the processing of S811, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C3 acquired in the processing of S807 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S811). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C3 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 7 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S810 or S811 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S812), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S812: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S813). In the process of S813, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S814), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S814: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot. Is determined (S815). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S815: Yes), the process proceeds to S817. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 64b as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S815, unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S815: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64b is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S816), and the process proceeds to S819. If it is determined in the process of S814 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S814: No), the process proceeds to the process of S817. In the processing of S817, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S817), and shift to the process of S819.

In the process of S812, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S812: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S818). In the process of S818, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S819.

In the process of S819, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S819), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S819: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S820), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S819: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state). S821), this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 64b is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball enters the second entry port 64b. It will be in an easy state.

In the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S822). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S820 or the process of S821 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S822, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S822: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S822, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S822: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823). In the process of S823, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S813, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S818, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S823, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S813 or the process of S818.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S824). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S824: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is set (S825), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is controlled. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S824, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S824: No), the process of S825 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the first This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C3 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S903).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is added by 1 (S904). Then, the value of the second random number counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S905), and this process is terminated. In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1001) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process shifts to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if it is not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S1112 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1112 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1214 of FIG. 35, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1112, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1104: No). S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1110, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1201 to S1206 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1209 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1201). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1204), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed and the specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65 is executed. (Large opening port) A jackpot control process for opening or closing 65a is executed (S1203). Here, the jackpot state of the special symbol specifically determines that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern production that becomes the jackpot has elapsed, and after the start of the jackpot is set, the end of the set jackpot is determined. Refers to the period until setting. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1203) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the second entry port 64b is executed (S1204). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S816 or the processing of S817 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1205). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S407 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S604 of the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29), the variation pattern is set. The variable display according to the above is started in the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S407 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S604 of the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29). When is finished, the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is finished, and the processing of S406 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) or S603 of the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29) is completed. The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S820 or the process of S821 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 31), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S823 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S813 or the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 31) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1208: Yes), the process is shifted to S1201, and each process after S1201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1208: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (249, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C3) can be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1207, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1210 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1210), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1211). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1212), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area to be backed up and the work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1207 is executed at the timing when a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1201 to S1206 ends, or at the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1209 performed within the remaining time ends. There is. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1201 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1203). This jackpot control process (S1203) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1301). Specifically, if the processing of S212 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1301, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1301: Yes), the opening command is set (S1302), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1301: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1303). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1303, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1303: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1303, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1303: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1304). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1304: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1305), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1306). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1304: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307). Specifically, 10 balls are formed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. If a prize is won, it is determined that the closing conditions have been met.

In the process of S1307, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1308), and this processing is completed. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1307: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S1309).

In the process of S1309, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1309: Yes), the setting value corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot is set and the setting value for the jackpot is reset. (S1310), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set, and this process is terminated. Although the details will be described later, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 37), the jackpot flag is initialized together with other set values (“00H” is set). Therefore, even if the power of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, only the jackpot flag is turned off, and other set values can be suppressed from being left at the jackpot setting.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an ending effect is set for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot after the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied in the final round of the jackpot. NS. In the process of S1309, when it is determined that the end timing of the set ending effect (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has elapsed), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot.

The end timing of the jackpot is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the final round of the jackpot, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied, it may be configured to shift to the jackpot end processing (S1310) as the end timing of the jackpot. ..

Next, the jackpot end process (S1310) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. As described above, this jackpot end process (S1310) is a process for setting a set value corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot and resetting the set value for the jackpot.

In this jackpot end process (S1310), first, the state setting table 202h is read from the ROM 202 (S1401). The term "read" as used herein means that the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D8H) of the start address (1AD8H) of the state setting table 202h are used as address data in any pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose registers). It means that it is stored in 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2).

Next, in the game result setting value acquisition process (see FIG. 28) executed before the start of this jackpot, the game result setting value acquisition process (see FIG. 28) was stored in advance in the offset value storage area of various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15). The offset value is stored in the accumulator 210a.

Next, an arithmetic process is performed in which the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a is multiplied by the number of data "D_SIZE" (S1403). As described above, "D_SIZE" indicates the number of data types corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). In the present embodiment, four types of setting values of a special symbol lottery state, a normal symbol state, a time saving number of times, and a variable pattern selection mode switching number are defined in the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, the numerical value corresponding to the number of data "D_SIZE" is "0004H".

As shown in parentheses in FIG. 13A, in the state setting table 202h, the lottery state of the special symbol corresponding to the offset value 00H, the state of the normal symbol, the number of time reductions, and the variation pattern selection from the side with the smaller address value. Mode switching count, special symbol lottery status corresponding to offset 01H, normal symbol status, time reduction count, variable pattern selection mode switching count, special symbol lottery status corresponding to offset 02H, normal symbol status, time reduction count, fluctuation Data is stored in the order of the number of times the pattern selection mode is switched. That is, every time the address value increases by four, the set value corresponding to the offset value larger by 1 is stored. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 is the difference (offset) between the start address of the state setting table 202h and the data storage address corresponding to the current offset value. In the process of S1403, the difference (offset) of the addresses with respect to the start address of the state setting table 202h is obtained.

When the processing of S1403 is completed, the difference between the address value set in the pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose register 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2) in the processing of S1401 with respect to the start address of the state setting table 202h calculated in the processing of S1402. (Offset) is added, and the added address is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1404).

Next, the address in which the probability change state flags of the various setting value storage areas 203e are stored is set as the setting destination address (S1405), and the data stored in the transfer source address set in the processing of S1404 at the setting destination address. Is transferred (S1406).

After that, it is determined whether or not all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407), and the transfer has not been completed (that is, the untransferred data type is If it is determined (S1407: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data specified in the added address is read (S1408), and 1 is added to the set destination address. The data is added and the data read in the process of S1408 is stored in the added address (S1409). Then, the process returns to S1407, and it is determined whether or not all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407). That is, the processes of S1407 to S1409 are repeated until all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h are transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, if it is determined that all four types of data specified in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407: Yes), the data is set to the various setting value storage areas 203e. A status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status is set (S1410), processing for clearing the set value of the jackpot (S1411, S1412) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

In the process of clearing the jackpot setting value, the address immediately before the start address of the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot of ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1411). , The zero setting process for initializing by setting 0 to the address where the set value during the jackpot in the various set value storage areas 203e is set is executed (S1412).

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 38, the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This zero setting process (see FIG. 38) is a process of initializing the various set value storage areas 203e by overwriting 0 with respect to the various set values set for controlling the jackpot.

In the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address to set a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501).

Next, in the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14), the address data stored in the address set as the transfer source (read source) address is read, and the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the read address data is read. Is set as the setting destination address (S1502).

After the processing of S1502, in the processing of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (reading source) address is "00H" (S1503), and it is determined that the read data is "00H". If so (S1503: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1503: No), "00H" is overwritten on the address of the RAM 203 set as the setting destination address (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

After that, the processes of S1501 to S1504 are repeated until "00H" is read from the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot. In the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 14), "00H" is stored only in the address at the end, and "00H" is not stored in the address other than the end, so it is specified other than the end. The processes of S1501 to S1504 are repeated until "00H" is stored in all the addresses corresponding to the address data.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), the number of times of setting "00H" as data in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. , It was determined that "00H" was read as data from the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot, without configuring the process to end when it was determined that the data setting for the set number of times was completed. It is configured to end the process in some cases.

If the number of settings is described in the control program, the designer of the control program newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diverting the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, it takes time to count the set values, and if the designer makes a mistake in counting, the control program specifies the wrong number of repetitions, so the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. This may not be possible and the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is only necessary to specify "00H" as data at the end of the clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) at the end of the jackpot, the designer at the time of designing the control program. Can reduce the possibility of making mistakes. Therefore, the setting of the data at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

The end condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) is the case where "00H" is read out as data in the lower byte of the address in the various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15). The address where is "00H" (that is, the address "F000H") is an area for storing the set value related to the launch of the ball, and the address whose set value is not changed before and after the end of the jackpot (initialization is required at the end of the jackpot). Because it is an address that does not Since it is an address that does not require initialization at the end of the jackpot, it is not necessary to specify it as the address to be initialized in the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 14), and the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 14). There is no possibility that it will appear except at the end of). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the process from being read out as data before the initialization of all the set values is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing (see S1716 in FIG. 30) is due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1713 in FIG. 40), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1716. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1716 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1716. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1716 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the data shifts to S1608.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1604, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1606). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1611) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1608 is performed via the processes of S1604 to S1606. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1609 is skipped when the processing of S1608 is reached via the processing of S1604 to S1606, the processing of S1604 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223, noise, etc. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset and the start-up process is started, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 is continued by saving the data in the work area of the RAM 223 without clearing it. Because it can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1701 this time was executed (S1701), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1710. In the process of S1701, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1702 to S1710 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1711 and the variation display setting process of S1712 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1707). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1707 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1709, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1710), and the process proceeds to the process of S1711. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1709 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1711, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1711). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the variation display setting process (S1712) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off process is executed (S1716). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1717), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to the process of S1701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1804). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). Further, in the process of S1808, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1808 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1808 every time the start winning prize is detected or the special symbol lottery is performed. It is adjusted to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of 110. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected. Or, at the time of lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S1807: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1809). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1810). After the processing of S1810 is completed, next, the winning information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1810 is the first of the empty areas (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Stored in the area (S1811),
Return to main processing.

In the process of S1809, if the winning information command is not received (S1809: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1812). Then, when the round number command is received (S1812: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1813), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1812: Yes). S1814), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1812, if the number of rounds command is not received (S1812: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1812: No). S1819), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1903).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1806 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the display control device is based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 55. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 43, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2401) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2502, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2502, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2401 in FIG. 43) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) (S2505), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2401) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2502. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2501. , And, after repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2502, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2403, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2404). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2405). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 53 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3702 in FIG. 53 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn. The determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. This can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while it is displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first ball entry port 64a or the second entry ball port 64b (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect is given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation effect of the power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c) is displayed. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing this command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2702) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2703) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49.

In the display setting process (S2703), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2704). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2703) or the simple display setting process (S2709). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), which are determined in the task process (S2704), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, front / rear out reach, front / back out, etc. The stop type table corresponding to either reach or complete deviation) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2708) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2709) is executed to display S2704. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2801: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (2801: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2703) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2803).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2804), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2805), the process returns to S2801.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2805) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2901).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901 in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2906), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2905, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2902e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2904, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2804, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2806). If there is a display variable type command (S2806: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2807), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2807) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) is supported. The stop type table is determined (S3001), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S3002).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4002 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S3003), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2704), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3003, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2806, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a display round number command (S2808: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2809) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3105), the round number command process (S2809) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 46).

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2808: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2810), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S2810: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2811) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (a). FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process (S2811). This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process (S2811), first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3703) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on. (S3201). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3202), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3201 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2810, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2810: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2812), and there is an error command. If (S2812: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2813) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3301). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3302). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process (S2703), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3302 is determined, and the error is determined. The process is executed so that the warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3302, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2812 (S2812: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2819), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

In the processing of S2801 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes). ), The processing of S2802 to S2819 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2801 to S2819 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2801 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2708) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 47 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other processes are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2901. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2703), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3401: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S3402 to S3404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3402), S3403 and S3404 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3403). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3404).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3501).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description of FIG. 50 is returned to. After the warning image setting process (S3404) or in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3403: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3405.

In S3405, the pointer update process is executed (S3405). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3601, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3603), and if it is a demo display data table (S3603: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3605), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3603: No). S3606), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3602, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3602: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 50 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3406 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3408: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3409).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3409: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3410), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3411). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by invoking another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2704), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3415, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3409: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3416). If the demo display flag is off (S3416: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3417) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3418). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3416, if the demo display flag is on (S3416: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table in which the display data table (any of FIGS. 18B and 18C) is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, the details of the transfer setting process (S2705) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701). If it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image is not transferred. The transfer setting process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 (b).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off (S3701: No) as a result of the processing of S3701, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident from the character ROM 234. It is transferred to the video RAM 235 for use. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3702), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3801), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3801: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3802). In the process of S3402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3802: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3803. Further, as a result of the processing of S3801, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3803.

In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3803: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3803 (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 45 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 49) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) (see S3701: No in FIG. 53 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3703), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3405) of the display setting process (S2703) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3902), and if it is the transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3903) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905.

Further, in the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3905. In the process of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3906).

In the process of S3906, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3906 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3906: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3907. Further, as a result of the processing of S3905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3905: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3907.

In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3908), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3909). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3909: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3909: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3910), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3911). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3912), and the process proceeds to the process of S3913.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The discrimination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3913 (S3913: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3914). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3914, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S4001). That is, in the processing of S4001, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2704). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S4002 (S4003). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. In the first embodiment, in order to read the set value corresponding to the offset value from the state setting table 202h, the label ""TBL1" and "D_SIZE" were associated with each other. That is, the label was used when reading a part of the table and setting it. On the other hand, in this modification, a method of defining a table that needs to be read out as a whole will be described. Examples of the table that needs to be read out collectively include the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c. In this modification, the first random number table 202a will be taken as an example for explanation.

FIG. 56 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability time, and FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability time. It is a figure shown. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. To determine whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability time is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit.

As described above, in the first hit random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 56 (a)) for low probability, three random numbers "7,107,240" are set as big hits of the special symbol. ing. These three random numbers are stored, for example, at the addresses 1A00H, 1A01H, and 1A02H of the ROM 202, respectively.

Further, in the first random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 56 (b)) for high probability, "4,11,15,28,38,45,52,64" is shown as a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol. , 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231,238, 249 " Has been done. These 30 random numbers are stored in the range of addresses 1A03H to 1A20H of ROM 202, for example. That is, the first random number table 202a1 for low probability and the first random number table 202a2 for high probability are continuously defined so that no free address is generated. Details will be described later, but by defining each table continuously, if only the start address of each table is known, it is specified in the table by taking the difference from the start address of the adjacent table. The number of existing data can be easily calculated.

Next, the description contents of each table in the program will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of description contents of the first random number table 202a1 for low probability and the first random number table 202a2 for high probability.

As shown in FIG. 57, first, "TL_TBL" is specified as a label indicating the first random number table 202a1 for low probability, and in the next line, the first random number table 202a for low probability is specified. 07H, 6BH, and F0H are specified as the data to be used. This random number value is specified in order from the address 00H of the ROM 202.

Further, in the line following the line in which the data (random number value) specified in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability is described, as a label indicating the first random number table 202a2 for high probability, " "TH_TBL" is specified.

From the next line where the label "TH_TBL" is specified, 30 random number values specified in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability are specified over 3 lines, 10 per line. There is. Of these three lines, the first line is described to associate 10 random values with each line from addresses 03H to 0CH, and the second line is described with 10 lines with addresses 0DH to 16H. It is described to associate one random number value at a time, and the third line is described to associate 10 random number values one by one with each line of addresses 17H to 20H.

By describing the random number values on a plurality of lines, it is possible for the program creator to easily find the omission of the description of the random number values. That is, if 30 random values are described together in one line, it becomes difficult to determine at a glance how many random values are specified, and it is assumed that some random values are leaked. However, it may be overlooked. On the other hand, in this modified example, the same number of random numbers are described separately on a plurality of lines. Therefore, for example, if the description of the random values is partially omitted only in the second line, the line length becomes longer. Since only the second line is shortened, it is possible to determine at a glance that there is an error in the second line. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress a program description error, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning based on the incorrect description. In this modification, the number of description of the random number value per line is set to 10, but the number is not limited to this, and the number may be set so that the description omission can be easily found. For example, the number of random numbers specified per line may be 6 and the description may be divided into 5 lines, or the number of random values specified per line may be 15 and the description may be divided into 2 lines. ..

In the row next to the row in which the data (random number value) specified in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability time is described, the second random number table 202c (ordinary symbol per random number table) for low probability time is placed. As a label to indicate, "FL_TBL" is defined, and from the next line, a random number value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol at a low probability of the ordinary symbol is described. Although the illustration is omitted, the random value that is a hit of a normal symbol is also described in a plurality of lines with 10 random values as the maximum value per line, like the random value that is a hit of a special symbol. There is.

In the program, the number of random number values constituting each table is defined in a place different from the specified place of each of the above-mentioned tables (first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c). Specifically, "TL_SIZE" is specified as the number of random numbers specified in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability, and further, it is specified in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability. "TH_SIZE" is defined as the number of random numbers. In this way, since the number of random values is defined by associating it with the label, it is necessary for the program creator to directly count the number of random values and specify it numerically in all the processes for reading the random values. No. In particular, when the program is diverted to another model, the number of random numbers may change, but in this modified example, the meanings of the labels "TL_SIZE" and "TH_SIZE" change even if the number changes. Therefore, it is not necessary to rewrite the content of the process of reading the number of random values in each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent omission of rewriting when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in rewriting the program. Further, in this modified example, in the program, the place where each table is described and the place where the number of random values constituting each table are described are described together in one place. By grouping the description points for each type of description content in this way, it is possible to prevent omission of rewriting by the program creator when diverting to another model. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in rewriting the program.

"TL_SIZE" is defined by the difference between the address indicated by the label "TH_TBL" and the address indicated by the label "TL_TBL". Further, "TH_SIZE" is defined by the difference between the address indicated by the label "FL_TBL" and the address indicated by the label "TH_TBL". In this way, if the number of random values specified in each table is defined by the label associated with the start address of each table, the specified position of the table in ROM 202 may change or the disorder specified in the table may change. Even if the number of numbers changes, there is no need to rewrite the label definition. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent omission of rewriting when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in rewriting the program. Further, in this modification, one random number value is stored in one address, and the random number value is defined so that no empty address is generated between the tables. As a result, the range of addresses specified in each table matches the number of random numbers, so the label associated with the start address of each table makes it easy to set the random values specified in each table. Can be calculated. The definition of the label is not limited to the content of this modification, and may be arbitrarily defined so that the program creator can easily understand it.

Next, the control process of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In the special symbol variation processing (S104) of this modification, each processing of S201 to S207 and each processing of S209 to S214 are each processing of S201 to S207 of the special symbol variation processing (S104) in the first embodiment. , And the same processing as each processing of S209 to S214 is executed. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, when the data in the special symbol hold storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area by the processing of S207 (S207), the jackpot determination process 2 is executed (S221), and this processing is terminated. .. The jackpot determination process 2 (S221) has a special symbol based on the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. The details of the jackpot determination process 2 (S221) will be described with reference to the following FIG. 59.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process 2 (S221) in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In each of the jackpot determination processes 2 (S221), S302, S303, S305, and S307 to S310, the same processes as the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when it is determined in the processing of S303 that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S303: Yes), then the address represented by "TH_TBL" (that is, high probability). The first random number table 202a2 for time is set as the comparison source address (S311), and "TH_SIZE" (that is, the number of random numbers specified in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability time). ) Is set as the number of comparisons (S312), and the process shifts to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (S303: No), then the address represented by "TH_TBL" (that is, the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability time). (Starting address of) is set as the comparison source address (S313), and "TL_SIZE" (that is, the number of random number values specified in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability) is set as the number of comparisons (S314). ), The process shifts to S305.

In the process of S305 that shifts after the process of S312 or S314, when the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer is read (S305), then the read first random number counter C1 is read. The value of is compared with the random number value specified in the comparison source address (S315). Then, while advancing the comparison source address by 1, the number of comparisons is subtracted by 1 (S316), and it is determined whether or not the number of comparisons after the subtraction is 0 (S317). If the determination result is 0 (S317: Yes), the process shifts to S307. On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S317 that the number of comparisons is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S317: No), the processing is shifted to S315 again, and S315 to S317 until the number of comparisons becomes 0. Repeat the process. That is, each random number value defined in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability or the first random number table 202a2 for high probability and the value of the first random number counter C1 are set. We will compare each random number value one by one.

In this way, by using the label when reading the table or reading the number of random values specified in the table, when the program is diverted to another model, the jackpot determination process 2 (S208) in the program. Since it is possible to omit the modification of the description content of, it is possible to suppress the modification error of the program. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a mistake in modifying the program.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the variation type data selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. Then, the fluctuation type data is converted into a pattern selection offset value using the offset setting table 202e, and is used for selecting the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. Further, in the offset setting table 202e, even if the fluctuation type data values are the same, if the fluctuation type data values (03H, 05H, 07H) are used, different pattern selection offset values are selected according to the number of reserved balls. It is configured to be done. This makes it possible to change the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern according to the number of reserved balls. More specifically, when a predetermined fluctuation type data value (03H, 05H, 07H) is selected, the fluctuation pattern type having a shorter fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases. There is.

With this configuration, when there are many reserved balls (that is, the fluctuation pattern production is continuous), it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time is long and only the fluctuation pattern production that is out of order as a result is continuous. Can be done. In general, the longer the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern production, the easier it is for the player to have an expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, the longer the fluctuation time of the deviation pattern production, the greater the disappointment of the player. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by configuring the deviation fluctuation of the long fluctuation time to be difficult to continue, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lost.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to select the fluctuation pattern type according to the number of reserved balls, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the fluctuation type data using the offset setting table 202e. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variable type data with the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the variable type counter value is set in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting to an offset value. Therefore, one of the most important processes in the game, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern effect, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the data table of the state setting table 202h and the first random number table 202a is specified in the program, it is specified in a predetermined address such as the start address of the table or in the table. A predetermined name (label) is associated with the number of data types. With this configuration, it is not necessary to directly describe the address value when configuring a program for reading a predetermined address or the number of data in the data table in other processing. In particular, if the model changes, the processing content and the number of data in the data table may change. Therefore, when the program used in this pachinko machine 10 is diverted to another game machine, the address assigned to each data table. The value and the specified data type may also change. Even in such a case, if a predetermined name (label) is associated with the address read by other processing, the predetermined address of the data table and the number of data types can be used when the program is diverted to another model. It is not necessary to re-enter the address of the data table and the number of data types in the description part of the process including the control to read the data. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a mistake in typing the program when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the mistake in the program.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined name (label) is associated with the number of data types specified in the data table and specified, the data table is associated with a predetermined address. It is specified by using the label. As a result, the creator of the program does not need to count the number of types of data specified in the data table and specify the counted numerical value in association with a predetermined name (label). That is, even if the predetermined address and the number of data types are changed due to the diversion of the program or the like, the number of data types is automatically calculated as a value corresponding to the program after diversion using the label. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a mistake in typing the program when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the mistake in the program.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. In the first embodiment described above, even if the value of the fluctuation type data selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same, the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Therefore, in the offset setting table 202e, the pattern selection offset value is specified to be different according to the number of reserved balls. Then, different fluctuation pattern types are selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) according to the pattern selection offset value.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the offset setting table 202e defines that the variation type data and the pattern selection offset value have a one-to-one correspondence relationship. That is, when the same variation type data is selected, the same pattern selection offset value is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Then, in the present embodiment, the data structure of the pattern selection offset value is determined, and if the data structure has a predetermined data structure, the pattern selection offset value is converted to a new offset value. Then, based on the offset value, the variation pattern type is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11). That is, instead of defining the offset value for the number of reserved balls in the offset selection table 202e, the program is configured to determine whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of reserved balls. As a result, the data capacity of the offset setting table 202e can be reduced as compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the above-mentioned "predetermined data structure" is performed is determined by whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1. Then, when it is determined that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1, the program executes a conversion of adding the number of reserved balls to the value with the most significant bit set to 0.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the offset setting table 202e of the ROM 202 are partially changed in the main controller 110. And a part of the processing included in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an offset setting table 202e according to the present embodiment. In the offset setting table 202e in the first embodiment, when the variation type data values are "03H", "05H", and "07H", different pattern selection offset values are selected according to the number of reserved balls. However, in the present embodiment, the variation type data value and the pattern selection offset value are configured to have a one-to-one correspondence relationship.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, when the fluctuation type data values are “00H” to “02H”, “04H”, “06H”, “08H” to “09H”, they are used as pattern selection offset values, respectively. The same values as those in the first embodiment are associated and defined. That is, for each of the above variation type data, as pattern selection offset values, "00H (binary notation 00000000000B)" to "02H (binary notation 0000000010B)", "07H (binary notation 00000011B)", "0CH (binary notation 000001100B)", "11H (binary notation 00010001B)" to "13H (binary notation 00010011B)" are associated with each other. In other words, the pattern selection offset values corresponding to the above-mentioned variable type data are all data in which the most significant bit is "0".

On the other hand, the pattern selection offset value associated with the variation type data value "03H" is "83H (binary notation 10000011B)", and the pattern associated with the variation type data value "05H". The selection offset value is "88H (10001000B in binary notation)", and the pattern selection offset value associated with the variation type data value "07H" is "8DH (10001000B in binary notation)". That is, the pattern offset values corresponding to the fluctuation type data "03H", "05H", and "07H" (that is, the fluctuation type data in which the fluctuation pattern type selected according to the number of reserved balls is different) are all the most significant bits. Is the data of "1".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1" in the disconnection setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) described later, and the variation pattern selection table is used. It is configured to calculate an offset value for specifying the fluctuation pattern type from 202f (see FIG. 11). That is, if the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1", the data "1" stored in the most significant bit is cleared, and a numerical value corresponding to the number of reserved balls is added (pattern selection offset). It is configured to convert the value to a value according to the number of reserved balls). Since it is not necessary to specify the data for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, the amount of data in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. Further, in the determination of whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of reserved balls, "1" is set as data in the most significant bit (empty bit) of the pattern selection offset value, which was not used in the first embodiment. It depends on whether it is stored or not. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of reserved balls without increasing the number of bits of the pattern selection offset value.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to store information corresponding to an offset value for selecting a fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in the lower bits of each pattern selection offset (upper bit). Does not store information corresponding to the offset), so it is possible to determine whether or not to perform conversion according to the number of reserved balls by using the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to convert to a value according to the number of reserved balls depending on whether or not "1" is stored as data in the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be stored in the sixth bit or the like.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main control device 110, and as described above, the special symbol hold ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81.

In each of the jackpot determination processes (S208), S301 to S308 and S310, the same processes as those of S301 to S308 and S310 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are performed. Will be executed. Then, in the jackpot determination process in the second embodiment, the loss time setting process 2 (S311) is executed instead of the loss time setting process (S309) in the first embodiment. That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the second embodiment, in the process of S307, it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 does not match any random number value defined in the comparison source table. In the case (S307: No), the disconnection setting process 2 is executed (S311), and the process shifts to S310. This out-of-order setting process 2 is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, similar to the out-of-off setting process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the above-mentioned off-set setting process 2 (S311) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the setting process 2 (S311) at the time of disconnection. This out-of-order setting process 2 (S311) is a process executed in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 61) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and as described above, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment. This is a process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern.

In each of the out-of-order setting processes 2 (S311), S601 and S604, the same processes as those in S601 and S604 of the out-of-order setting process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed, respectively. Will be done. Then, in the offset setting process 2 (S311) in the second embodiment, when the variable type data is selected from the variable type selection table 202d based on the value of the variable type counter CS1 in the process of S601 (S601), then, the variable type data is selected (S601). Based on the selected variation type data, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the offset setting table 202e (S611), and it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the determined pattern selection offset value is "1" (S612). .. Then, when it is determined that the most significant bit is "1" (S612: Yes), the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is cleared to "0", and then the pattern selection offset value of the current reserved ball is set. The number (that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c) is added and set as a new offset value (S613), and the process shifts to S615.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S612 that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is not "1" (that is, "0") (S612: No), the pattern selection offset value determined in the processing of S611 is determined. Is set as an offset value as it is (S614), and the process shifts to S615. In the processing of S615, the variation pattern type specified in the destination address of 1AF5H, which is the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, by the offset value set in the processing of S613 or S614 is executed this time. It is selected as the variable pattern type of the pattern effect (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the processing shifts to S604.

In this way, in the processing of S612, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1", and if the most significant bit is "1", it is converted into a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls. By configuring in this way, the number of data specified in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is defined to be "1" in the fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is different according to the number of reserved balls. There is. Further, when the variation pattern type is selected based on the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e, the number of reserved balls is set based on whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1". It is configured to determine whether or not to convert to the corresponding value. With this configuration, it is not necessary to specify the pattern selection offset values for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, so that the amount of data specified in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the increase in the capacity of the ROM 202, the production cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variable type data with the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the variable type counter value is set in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting to an offset value. Therefore, one of the most important processes in the game, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern effect, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 79. In the second embodiment described above, the jackpot, the deviation when the ball enters the first entry port 64a, and the deviation when the ball enters the second entry port 64b are obtained from the variation pattern selection table 202f. It was configured so that the variation pattern type was selected. Further, in some deviations, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same, the fluctuation pattern effect of a different mode is set according to the number of reserved balls.

In addition to this, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that different variable pattern types are selected based on the previous jackpot type (type of the first symbol) and the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot. Has been done. As a result, the variation of the variable pattern effect can be diversified, and it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is notified based on the effect content executed in a predetermined period after the jackpot ends. It is configured as follows. Specifically, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery 10 times, the display image is ranked up in the third symbol display device 81, and the rank is the maximum. When becomes, it is notified that the state has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol. More specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect of growing the plant displayed on the screen was performed, and when the plant grew completely and the flower bloomed, the state shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol. Is configured to be notified (see FIGS. 71 to 75). By executing the rank-up effect for a predetermined period of time in this way, it is possible to make the player happy and disappointed with the result of each effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that in the main control device 110, the first type selection table 202b, the variable type selection table 202d, and the offset of the ROM 202 are used. The contents of the setting table 202e and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f have been partially changed, and the selection table 202j at the time of disconnection has been newly added. Is added, the rank information storage area 223e is added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and one included in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The partial processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and a part of the processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the pachinko in the second embodiment. This is different from the machine 10. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 70. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with the hit type storage area 203f and the fluctuation number counter 203g. Has been done. The hit type storage area 203f is an area for storing data according to the jackpot type, and the previous jackpot type can be specified based on the data stored in this area. Further, the fluctuation number counter 203g is a counter that counts the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the end of the jackpot, and is cleared to 0 each time the jackpot is won.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the rank information storage area 223e is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the effect of increasing the rank of the display image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Data for specifying this rank is stored in the rank information storage area 223e, and control is performed so that an appropriate effect according to the current rank is executed based on the stored data.

Further, FIGS. 64 to 70 are a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, and a diagram showing various data defined in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 64A, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is provided with a disconnection selection table 202j in addition to the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment. The details will be described later, but the out-of-order selection table 202j includes the previous jackpot type (type of the first symbol) and the special symbol executed after the jackpot from a plurality of tables defined in the variable type selection table 202d. It is a table used to select one table according to the number of lottery.

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64 (b). In the present embodiment, there are 14 types of jackpots: "time saving jackpot A" to "time saving jackpot C", "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot H", and "latent probability variation jackpot A" to "latent probability variation jackpot C". There is a big hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", "time saving jackpot A" is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2. When is in the range of "70 to 89", "time saving jackpot B" is selected, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 99", "time saving jackpot C" is selected. Will be done.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "100 to 101", "probability variation jackpot A" is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "102 to 106". In that case, "probability variation jackpot B" is selected, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "107 to 111", "probability variation jackpot C" is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2. When is in the range of "112 to 126", "probability variation jackpot D" is selected. Further, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "127 to 141", "probability variation jackpot E" is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "142 to 151". In that case, "probability variation jackpot F" is selected, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "152 to 161", "probability variation jackpot G" is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2. When is in the range of "162 to 171", "probability variation jackpot H" is selected.

Then, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "172 to 176", "latent probability variation jackpot A" is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "177 to 186". If there is, "latent probability variation jackpot B" is selected, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "187 to 199", "latent probability variation jackpot A" is selected.

In addition, "time saving jackpot A" to "time saving jackpot C" differ from each other in the selection method of the fluctuation pattern type after the jackpot ends, but other than that (the number of rounds of the jackpot, the number of time saving of the normal symbol, etc.), the number is the same. 2 It is the same as the "big hit A (time saving big hit)" of the embodiment. Further, regarding "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot H", the selection method of the fluctuation pattern type after the jackpot ends is different from each other, but other operations such as the number of rounds of the jackpot are described in "big hit B" of the second embodiment. (Probability change jackpot) ”is the same. Similarly, the "latent probability variation jackpot A" to "latent probability variation jackpot C" are the same as the "big hit C (latent probability variation jackpot)" of the second embodiment except for the operation of selecting the variation pattern type.

In this way, by providing a wide variety of jackpots with different selection methods for the variable pattern type, it is possible to execute various variable pattern effects, so that it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming monotonous. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the variation type selection table 202d defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation type selection table 202d. In the variable type selection table 202d of the second embodiment, three types of tables are defined: a hit selection table 202d1, a special figure 1 deviation selection table 202d2, and a special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3. In the present embodiment, in addition to the above three types of tables, a selection table for latency 202d4, a selection table for promotion period 202d5, a selection table for promotion period 202d6, a selection table for promotion period 202d7, a selection table for promotion period 202d8, and promotion Nine types of tables are provided: a period selection table 202d9, a promotion period selection table 202d10, a promotion period end selection table 202d11, and a promotion period end selection table 202d12.

The latent selection table 202d4 has shifted to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, but the player was not notified that the special symbol has shifted to the high-probability state in the rank-up effect. In this case, it is a table used to select the mode of the out-of-order variation effect of the end of the rank-up effect.

Further, the promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table that is referred to during the period in which the rank-up effect is executed, and is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the rank-up is not selected. On the other hand, the promotion period selection table 202d6 is a table in which the probability that the variation type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to a low probability (30%). Further, in the promotion period selection table 202d7, the probability that the variation type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to a medium level (50%), and the promotion period selection table 202d8 is the variation corresponding to the rank up. The probability that the type data is selected is set to a high probability (70%), and in the promotion period selection table 202d9, the probability that the variable type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to the maximum (90%). ing. Further, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which variable type data corresponding to the effect of raising the rank up to the maximum rank at once is always selected regardless of the current rank status.

Further, the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect for notifying that the rank has not been raised to the maximum is always selected in the rank-up effect, and is for the end of the promotion period. The selection table 202d12 is a table in which variable type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has been increased to the maximum rank in the rank-up effect (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol) is always selected. By selecting each of these tables according to the type of jackpot and the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot is completed, a wide variety of effects can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In FIG. 65, in order to simplify the explanation, No. 0-No. Although the numbers 11 are associated with each other, in an actual program, different labels are associated with the start address of each table. Then, when the table is read by other processing, each table is read by the label associated with each table. As a result, when diverting the program, only the label definition needs to be changed, and it is not necessary to modify the program for each process of reading the table, so that it is possible to suppress data typos by the program creator. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to the provision of incorrect data. Examples of label names associated with each table are, for example, "C_TBL0" to "C_TBL11".

Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (a), after the jackpot ends, the player shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol. The details of the latent selection table 202d4 used for selecting the variation pattern type at the time of disconnection when not notified will be described. FIG. 66A is a diagram showing the value of the variation type data selected for each value of the variation type counter CS1 defined in the latent selection table 202d4. As shown in FIG. 66A, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, "07H" is selected as the variation type data, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 174. For example, if "08H" is selected as the fluctuation type data and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 175 to 189, "09H" is selected as the fluctuation type data and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 190 to 199. If it is in the range of, "0AH" is selected as the variation type data.

In the latent selection table 202d4, the selection ratio of "07H", which is the variation type data corresponding to the complete deviation, is set lower than that of the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3 (FIG. 9B). The rate at which variable type data corresponding to out-of-order short reach, out-of-order long reach, and out-of-order super reach is selected is set high. That is, when the latent selection table 202d4 is selected, it becomes easy to select the fluctuation pattern type having a long fluctuation time. As a result, even if the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol is not notified in the rank-up effect, the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol is internally performed by the continuous variation pattern effect having a long fluctuation period. You can expect the player to be there. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 66B, the promotion period selection table 202d5, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. The promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table in which rank-up does not occur. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 99, the fluctuation time is short and the fluctuation pattern type (short fluctuation for promotion period) that fails to rank up is supported. If "0BH", which is the fluctuation type data to be used, is selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 100 to 199, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation pattern type (for promotion period) that fails to rank up. “0CH”, which is the variation type data corresponding to the long variation A), is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (c), the promotion period selection table 202d6, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. The promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table in which the probability of rank-up occurring is set to a low probability (30%). As shown in FIG. 66 (c), if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 79, the fluctuation time is short and the fluctuation pattern type (short fluctuation for promotion period) that fails to rank up is supported. If "0BH", which is the fluctuation type data to be used, is selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 80 to 139, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation pattern type (for promotion period) that fails to rank up. “0CH”, which is the fluctuation type data corresponding to the middle fluctuation A), is selected. Further, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 140 to 199, the fluctuation type data corresponds to the fluctuation type (middle fluctuation B for promotion period) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and the rank is successfully upgraded. "0DH" is selected.

The promotion period selection table 202d7 to the promotion period selection table 202d9 are variation type data corresponding to the variation type (middle variation B for promotion period) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and the rank is successfully upgraded. Since the proportion of "0DH" selected is only increasing, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the promotion period selection table 202d10, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a). As described above, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which the variable type that ranks up to the highest rank is selected regardless of the current rank. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the promotion period selection table 202d10 is selected, all the values of the variation type counter CS1 correspond to the variation type (long variation A for promotion period) that ranks up to the highest rank. "0EH", which is the variable type data to be used, is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67 (b), a selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period, which is a table referred to at the end of the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has not been raised to the maximum is always selected in the rank-up effect. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the selection table 202d11 at the end of the promotion period is selected, the fluctuation type for notifying that the rank has not been fully upgraded to the maximum rank in all the fluctuation type counter CS1 values. “0FH”, which is the variation type data corresponding to (long variation B for promotion period), is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67 (c), a selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period, which is a table referred to at the end of the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, in the selection table 202d12 at the end of the promotion period, the variable type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has been raised to the maximum rank (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol) is always selected. Table. As shown in FIG. 67 (c), when the selection table 202d12 at the end of the promotion period is selected, the variation type (promotion period) for notifying that the rank has been upgraded to the maximum rank in all the values of the variation type counter CS1. “10H”, which is the variation type data corresponding to the long variation C), is selected.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to refer to the various tables described above so that a wide variety of variable pattern effects can be selected according to the game situation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the production from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment with reference to FIG. 68, the offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the configuration of the offset setting table 202e. As shown in FIG. 68, in the offset setting table 202e in the third embodiment, in addition to the offset setting table 202e in the second embodiment, the pattern selection offset value corresponding to the variation type selected in the rank-up period and the variation The correspondence with the value of the type data is specified. More specifically, the pattern selection offset value "14H" is associated with the variation type data value "0BH", and the pattern selection offset value "15H" is associated with the variation type data value "0CH". The pattern selection offset value "16H" is associated with the variation type data value "0DH", and the pattern selection offset value "17H" is associated with the variation type data value "0EH". The pattern selection offset value "18H" is associated with the variation type data value "0FH", and the pattern selection offset value "19H" is associated with the variation type data value "10H". There is.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting the variation pattern type based on the pattern selection offset value will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 69, in the variation pattern selection table 202f in the third embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern selection table 202f in the second embodiment, the variation pattern type selected in the rank-up period is defined.

More specifically, address 1B09H has a fluctuation time of 6 seconds, and a fluctuation pattern type (short variation for promotion period) that fails to rank up is defined, and address 1B0AH has a fluctuation time of 8 seconds. A variation pattern type that exists and fails to rank up (middle variation A for promotion period) is defined, and a variation pattern type that has a variation time of 9 seconds and succeeds in rank upgrade (promotion period) at address 1B0BH. Middle fluctuation B) is specified. Further, the fluctuation time is 12 seconds for the address 1B0CH, and the fluctuation pattern type (long fluctuation B for the promotion period) that is promoted to the maximum rank is defined, and the fluctuation time is 13 seconds for the address 1B0DH. In addition, a variation pattern type (long variation B for promotion period) for notifying that the maximum rank could not be promoted in the rank-up effect is defined, and the variation time is 14 seconds at the address 1B0EH, and the rank. The variation pattern type (long variation C for promotion period) for notifying that the player has been promoted to the maximum rank in the up effect is specified.

By defining a wide variety of fluctuation pattern types in this way, various fluctuation pattern types can be selected according to the state of the game, so that it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the disconnection selection table 202j defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The out-of-order selection table 202j is a table in which the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the end of the jackpot (the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot) and the table referred to for selecting the variation type data are used for each of the previous jackpot types. It is a table that defines the relationship. In FIG. 70, “No.” represents “No.” attached to each table defined in the variable type selection table 202d (see FIG. 65).

As shown in FIG. 70, for example, when the previous jackpot was "time saving jackpot A", the special symbol lottery is performed from the end of the time saving jackpot A until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 9 times. Every time it comes off, No. 1 is displayed in the variable type selection table 202d. Read the table of 5 and refer to it to select the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 5 means the selection table 202d6 for the promotion period, in the lottery of each special symbol, in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect of succeeding in ranking up only with a probability of 30% is achieved. Not done. In addition, in the 10th special symbol lottery, No. The table of 10 is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 10 means the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period, an effect for notifying that the rank could not be raised to the maximum rank is performed in the variation pattern effect. Then, in the 11th and subsequent lottery of special symbols, No. Table 1 or No. Any one of the tables of 2 (that is, either the special drawing 1 deviation selection table 202d2 or the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

Further, for example, when the previous jackpot is "probability change jackpot D", it changes every time the special symbol lottery is missed from the end of the probability variation jackpot D to the end of the special symbol lottery 9 times. From the type selection table 202d, No. Read the table of No. 7 and refer to it to select the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 7 means the selection table 202d8 for the promotion period, in the lottery of each special symbol, in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect of succeeding in ranking up is performed with a probability of 70%. Will be. In addition, in the 10th special symbol lottery, No. The table of 11 is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 11 means the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period, in order to notify that the rank has been raised to the maximum rank (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol) in the fluctuation pattern production. Is performed. Then, in the 11th and subsequent lottery of special symbols, No. Table 1 or No. Any one of the tables of 2 (that is, either the special drawing 1 deviation selection table 202d2 or the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

Also, for example, if the previous jackpot was "probability change jackpot G", it will change each time the special symbol lottery is missed from the end of the probability variation jackpot G until the special symbol lottery is completed four times. From the type selection table 202d, No. Read the table of 8 and refer to it to select the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 8 means the selection table 202d9 for the promotion period, in the lottery of each special symbol, in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect of succeeding in ranking up is performed with a probability of 90%. Will be. In addition, in the 5th special symbol lottery, No. Read the table of 9 and refer to it to select the variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 9 means the selection table 202d10 for the end of the promotion period, the effect of raising the rank to the maximum rank is performed in the variation pattern effect. Then, in the 6th and subsequent lottery of special symbols, No. Table 1 or No. Any one of the tables of 2 (that is, either the special drawing 1 deviation selection table 202d2 or the special drawing 2 deviation selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to for selecting the variation type data.

In addition, even though the previous jackpot is "Time saving jackpot A" to "Time saving jackpot C" and "Hidden probability variation jackpot A" to "Hidden probability variation jackpot C", it will not rise to the highest rank by rank up. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured so that the current rank can be grasped. Specifically, the current rank is determined based on the rank information stored in the rank information storage area 223e. Then, in a state where the rank information is one rank lower than the maximum rank, the fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the rank up (that is, the long fluctuation A for the promotion period with the fluctuation time of 12 seconds) is changed by the fluctuation pattern command. When notified, the variation time is the same (12 seconds), and the mode of the variation pattern effect that fails to rank up is selected. Then, the display variation pattern command is set based on the selected mode.

Although not shown, the selection table 202j at the time of disconnection includes the number of lottery of special symbols when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed, and the table to be selected. Correspondence relationship of is also stipulated. When the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed, for example, regardless of the number of times the special symbol is drawn, the selection for removing the special figure 1 is performed until the first big hit is won. It is configured so that either the table 202d2 or the selection table 202d3 for removing the special figure 2 is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rank-up effect from occurring immediately after the power is turned on (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). Therefore, even though there is no possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol, the rank-up effect occurs, the player is confused, and it becomes difficult to have a sense of expectation for the rank-up effect. Can be suppressed.

The control when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed is not limited to this. For example, the variation type selection table 202d may be configured to prepare a table that is selected only during the period from when the power is turned on until the first jackpot is won, so that a dedicated variation pattern type is displayed. .. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) of the pachinko machine 10 is often pressed when the hall is opened. Therefore, by preparing a dedicated variation pattern type, the player can use it exclusively. You can look forward to the fluctuation pattern type. Therefore, since the player can start the game immediately after the store opens, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall can be improved.

Next, a specific example of the rank-up effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the rank-up period will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. In the rank-up effect of the present embodiment, the rank D, which is the lowest rank, is set after the jackpot ends. Then, each time the variation pattern type corresponding to the rank increase is selected, the rank is increased in the order of rank C, rank B, rank A, and rank S. Further, if the rank is increased to rank S, the player is notified that the special symbol has shifted to the high probability state.

FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is fluctuating in the case of rank D, which is the lowest rank in the rank-up period. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), “Rank D” is displayed in the rectangular area provided on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation of the third symbol. That is, the rectangular area provided in the upper left is an area for displaying the current rank information.

Further, in the horizontally long substantially rectangular area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, "rank up with the appearance of the chance eye (341)" is displayed. With this display content, the player is notified that the rank will be upgraded when a combination of "3", "4", and "1", which is a chance eye, appears as a result of the fluctuation pattern production. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play with the expectation that a chance eye will appear.

Further, in the rectangular area provided in the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, "promotion chance remaining 9 times" is displayed. This number of times is a number indicating how many times the rank-up period remains, and is subtracted and displayed by 1 each time the variation pattern effect is executed once.

Further, an image of the ground is displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, plants grow on the ground according to the rank, and the plants bloom at the highest rank (see FIG. 74). By displaying the visually easy-to-understand effect in this way, the player can easily recognize the current rank.

FIG. 71B is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is not increased as a result of the variation pattern effect executed during the rank-up period. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the rank is not increased (that is, when the short fluctuation for the promotion period or the middle fluctuation A for the promotion period is selected as the fluctuation pattern type), it is the chance eye "3". , "4", and combinations other than "1" (combinations of "3", "8", and "1" in the example of FIG. 71 (b)) are stopped and displayed. Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed so as to notify the player that the rank could not be upgraded.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is increased will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the display contents when the rank is increased in the rank D which is the lowest rank. When upgrading the rank, first, the symbols "3", "4", and "1", which are combinations of chance eyes, are displayed, and at the same time, with respect to the ground displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. , The effect of light coming in from above is displayed (see FIG. 72 (a)). Then, as the plant sprouts appear on the ground, "Rank up !!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 72 (b)). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been increased. Further, "Rank D → C" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 72 (b)). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the rank has been increased from rank D to rank C by this rank increase.

Next, when the rank is increased from rank C to rank B, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). As shown in FIG. 73A, when the rank is increased from rank C to rank B, the buds displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 grow. Specifically, the number of leaves of the plant increases to four, and the total length of the plant doubles. Further, as in the case of ranking up from rank D to rank C, "Rank up !!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, "Rank C → B" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to rank B by this rank up. Although not shown, the effect of shining light from above on the buds of the plant is performed before the plant grows. That is, even when the rank is upgraded to rank B, the same effect as in FIG. 72 (a) is performed. It should be noted that the same effect is performed when the rank is raised to rank A or rank S, but the illustration is omitted.

Next, a case where the rank is increased from rank B to rank A will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the rank is increased from rank B to rank A, the plant displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 grows further, and flower buds are displayed at the tip of the plant. Will be done. Further, as in the case of ranking up to rank C or rank B, "rank up !!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, "Rank B → A" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to rank A by this rank up.

Next, a case of increasing the rank from rank A to rank S will be described with reference to FIG. 74. As shown in FIG. 74, when the rank is increased from rank A to rank S, the flowered state of the plant displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Further, as in the case of ranking up to another rank, "Rank up !!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, "Rank A → S" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to rank S by this rank up.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern effect executed at the end of the rank-up period will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is raised to the highest rank, and FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing the case where the rank is not raised to the highest rank. It is a figure which shows the display content which is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when notifying the player that the player has been ranked up to the highest rank and has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol, "3" is used as the stop symbol of the third symbol. The chance eye consisting of the combination of "4" and "1" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the flowering plant on the right side shines. In addition, the characters "probability change rush!" Are displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "promotion" are displayed in the upper right area of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. Actually, when the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but by displaying the word "promotion", the player launches the ball during the rank-up period. Depending on the timing etc., it can be made to feel as if the special symbol has been shifted to the high probability state by itself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), if the maximum rank cannot be reached during the rank-up period, the stop symbol other than the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the stop symbol of the third symbol. (In the example of FIG. 75 (b), the combination of "3", "5", and "1"), the plant on the right side is displayed in a dead state. Further, the characters "promotion failure ..." are displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, and "promotion chance remaining" is displayed in the upper right area of the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the characters "0 times", it is possible to make the player recognize that the rank could not be increased to the maximum rank.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main control device 110, and as described above, the special symbol hold ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81.

In each of the jackpot determination processes (S208), S301 to S307 and S310, the same processes as those of S301 to S307 and S310 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are performed. Will be executed. Then, in the jackpot determination process in the third embodiment, the jackpot setting process 2 (S321) and the missed time setting process 2 (S321) are replaced with the jackpot setting process (S308) and the missed time setting process 2 (S311) in the second embodiment. Setting process 3 (S322) is executed.

That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the third embodiment, in the process of S307, it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any random number value defined in the comparison source table. In the case (S307: Yes), the jackpot setting process 2 (S321) is executed, and the process shifts to S310. Similar to the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, the jackpot setting process 2 is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol.

On the other hand, in the processing of S307, when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 does not match any of the random number values specified in the comparison source table (S307: No), the setting process at the time of loss 3 is executed (S322), and the process shifts to S310. Similar to the disconnection setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, the disconnection setting process 3 is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment.

Next, the jackpot setting process 2 (S321) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 2 (S321). Of the jackpot setting process 2 (S321), each of the processes S401 to S408 executes the same process as the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. Then, in the jackpot setting process 2 in the third embodiment, after the jackpot type is determined in the process of S402, the data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the hit type storage area 203f (S411). Here, as the data according to the jackpot type, for example, values from "00H" to "0DH" are assigned in the order of the jackpot type specified in the first hit type selection table 202b, and assigned to the current jackpot type. The obtained value may be stored in the hit type storage area 203f.

Next, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g is cleared (S412), and the process shifts to S403. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to determine the type of fluctuation pattern based on the data corresponding to the jackpot type stored in the hit type storage area 203f and the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the above-mentioned disconnection setting process 2 (S311) will be described. The disconnection setting process is a process executed in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 61) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and as described above, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, the mode of the variation pattern is changed. This is a process for setting. In each of the out-of-order setting processes 3 (S322), S601, S604, and S611 to S613, the same processes as those in the out-of-off time setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) are executed. Then, in the disconnection setting process 3 in the third embodiment, first, 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 203 g (S621). Then, the table to be referred to is changed based on the loss selection table 202j from the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g after adding 1 and the information based on the previous jackpot jackpot type stored in the hit type storage area 203f. Select from the type selection table 202d (S622). Then, when the processing of S622 is completed, the processing shifts to S601. By the processing of S621 and S622, a wide variety of variation patterns can be executed based on the jackpot type of the jackpot won last time and the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the out-of-order setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) of the present embodiment fluctuates based on the information stored in the hit type storage area 202f and the value of the fluctuation number counter 202g regardless of the state of the gaming machine. It is configured to select the table for selecting the type data, but only in the high probability state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the information stored in the type storage area 202f and the fluctuation count counter 202g It may be configured to select a table for selecting variation type data based on the value of. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, either the special figure 1 out-of-order selection table 202d2 or the special figure 2 out-of-order selection table 202d3 May be configured to be selected. As a result, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, a table for selecting the variable type data based only on the type of the entry port into which the ball has entered is selected from the variable type selection table 202d. Because it can be done, the judgment condition can be reduced. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the variation display setting process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a variation display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. This variation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the main process is performed. This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110.

In each of the variable display setting processes (S1712), S1901 to S1903 and S1905 to S1910, the same processes as those of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed. .. Then, in the command determination process in the third embodiment, when the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is acquired in the process of S1903 (S1903), the extracted variation pattern and the rank information storage area are obtained. Based on the information about the current rank stored in 223e, a display variation pattern command corresponding to an appropriate variation pattern production according to the rank is set (S1911). After the processing of S1911 is completed, the processing shifts to S1905.

By setting the display variation pattern command in consideration of the information about the rank stored in the rank information storage area 223e, an appropriate display effect according to the rank is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the rank-up effect. Can be made to.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 84. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed, the variation pattern differs depending on the jackpot type of the previous jackpot and the number of lottery of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot. It was configured so that the type was selected. In this modification, in addition to this, a different fluctuation pattern type is selected according to the fluctuation pattern type selected when the previous jackpot is notified. As a result, the variation pattern effect can be executed in a wider variety of modes than the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 80, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is shown. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment. In this modification, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a variation type storage area 203h for storing information for identifying the variation pattern type when notifying the previous jackpot. The difference is that they are. The details will be described later, but if the lottery for the special symbol is not performed, the variation pattern type is set based on the information stored in the variation type storage area 203h. The other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment.

Next, the variation type selection table 202d in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81A is a diagram showing a variation type selection table 202d defined in ROM 202 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in this modification, the variation type selection table 202d shows the No. A special mode selection table 202d13 has been added as a table corresponding to 13. Although the details will be described later, the special mode selection table 202d13 shows that when the mode of the fluctuation pattern effect when notifying the previous jackpot is executed in the so-called premium reach mode, the variation pattern effect after the jackpot is produced. It is a table referred to when selecting an aspect. This special mode selection table is a table that may be selected after the jackpot ends when a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol is won, and the fluctuation time is extremely short (for example, 0. 5 seconds) Fluctuation type data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type is specified.

Further, instead of the hit selection table 202d1 in the third embodiment, No. 13, No. A selection table 202d14 for non-probability variation and a selection table 202d15 for probability variation are added to 14, respectively. In this modification, the variation type data is selected from different tables depending on whether or not the probability variation jackpots A to H are won. Furthermore, the variable type data corresponding to the hit premium reach is specified only in the table referred to at the time of the probability change jackpot. As a result, the premium reach occurs only in the case of the probability change jackpot, so the player who recognizes that the reach this time is the premium reach recognizes that the player shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol during the fluctuation pattern production. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. When this hit premium reach is set, for example, an effect of flowering a plant may be executed as a display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Normally, it informs whether or not the plant has transitioned to the high probability state of the special symbol depending on whether or not the plant blooms during the rank-up period after the jackpot ends, but if the hit premium reach is displayed, The effect that the plant blooms before entering the rank-up period will be displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is made before the transition to the jackpot state.

FIG. 81B is a diagram showing a selection table 202d14 for non-probability variation of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the non-probability variation hit selection table 202d14, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H is set as the variation type data corresponding to the hit short reach. When selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the hit long reach, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 180 to 199. If so, 02H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the winning super reach.

Further, FIG. 81 (c) is a diagram showing a selection table 202d15 for probability variation of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the non-probability variation hit selection table 202d15, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, 01H is set as the variation type data corresponding to the hit long reach. When selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 169, 02H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the hit super reach, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 170 to 199. If so, 11H is selected as the variable type data corresponding to the winning premium reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the detachment selection table 202j of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a selection table 202j at the time of deviation of this modification. As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when the previous jackpot was various probability variation jackpots, the fluctuation pattern type selected after the jackpot ends according to the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot was notified. Is different. Specifically, the previous jackpot type was jackpot A, and the variable pattern types selected when notifying the jackpot were "hit short reach", "hit long reach", and "hit super reach" (non-premium reach). If this is the case, the same table as the out-of-order selection table 202j in the third embodiment is selected from the variable type selection table 202d.

On the other hand, if the previous jackpot type was jackpot A and the variable pattern type was "winning premium reach" selected when notifying the jackpot, regardless of the number of special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, No. Twelve tables are selected. That is, the variation type data is selected from the special mode selection table 202d13. As described above, since the variation type data corresponding to the variation pattern type of the extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is defined in the selection table 202d13 for the special mode, the winning is not suspended. Since it is executed immediately, the game can proceed speedily. Therefore, since the perceived time until the next big hit can be shortened, the player can be made to feel that the big hits are continuous at very short intervals in the high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As for the probabilistic jackpots B to H, as with the probabilistic jackpot A, the fluctuation pattern types selected when notifying the jackpot are "hit short reach", "hit long reach", and "hit super reach" (non-premium reach). ), The same table as the out-of-order selection table 202j in the third embodiment is selected from the variable type selection table 202d. Then, when the variable pattern type is "win premium reach" selected when notifying the jackpot, No. 1 is determined regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot ends. Twelve tables are selected. In addition, although the illustration is omitted, when the previous jackpot is a time-saving jackpot A to C and a latent probability variation jackpot A to C, the third implementation is performed regardless of the fluctuation pattern type when notifying the jackpot. The same table as the out-of-order selection table 202j in the form is selected from the variation type selection table 202d.

In this modification, the table selected after the end of the jackpot notified by the hit premium reach is set to the special mode selection table 202d13 regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols, and the fluctuation time is extremely short (for example, 0.5 seconds). ) Was configured to be executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern type having a relatively long variation time (for example, 20 seconds) may be selected. Further, as a display effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display effect peculiar to the end of the jackpot (special mode) notified by the hit premium reach may be executed. With this configuration, the player can play the game with one pleasure to see the unique effect displayed only in the special mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As an example of the display effect in the variable pattern effect executed after the end of the big hit, for example, the plant in the flowered state may be configured to execute the effect of producing fruits. That is, if the fruit is fruitful, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and if the fruit is not fruitful, it indicates that the lottery of the special symbol is not accepted. By configuring in this way, the winning premium reach is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, the story shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, and in the flow until the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the special symbol. It is possible to execute a series of sexual display effects. Further, in order to further enhance the relevance of the effect, the display effect during the jackpot may also be a plant-related effect. For example, if a hit premium reach is used to produce a flowering effect and a jackpot is notified, even if a fireworks display is launched in the background to celebrate the flowering of the plant at the notified jackpot. good. With this configuration, the connection between the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the hit premium reach and the variable pattern effect after the big hit becomes easier to understand. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this modified example, if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A to H, the variation pattern effect can be selected in the mode of the hit premium reach, but some of the jackpots A to H (for example, the probability variation jackpot A to H) , Probability change jackpot A) may be configured so that the hit premium reach is selected only. That is, in the variation type selection table 202d, for example, even in the case of the probability variation jackpots B to H, the variation type data is selected with reference to the non-probability variation hit selection table 202d14, and the probability variation jackpot selection is performed only in the case of the probability variation jackpot A. Table 202d15 may be configured to be selected. In addition, a dedicated table for probabilistic jackpots B to H is provided, and the mode of hit premium reach is not selected, but variable type data is selected in a form different from time-saving jackpots A to C and latent probabilistic jackpots A to C. It may be configured as. In this way, if the hit premium reach is selected only for a part of the probabilistic jackpots A to H (for example, jackpot A), the hit premium reach and the state after the jackpot A is completed (special). Mode) can be made rare. Therefore, when a winning premium reach or a special mode appears, it is possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment.

Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. First, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process (S208) of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. Among the jackpot determination processes of this modification, the processes of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 are the same as the processes of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 76) in the third embodiment. Is executed.

Further, in the jackpot determination process of this modification, the result of comparing the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a with the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. When it is determined that there is no matching random number value (S307: No), the loss time setting process 4 is executed (S331) instead of the loss time setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment. The process shifts to S310. The out-of-order setting process 4 is a process for setting a variation pattern type for notifying that the lottery of the special symbol has been missed. The details of the disconnection setting process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 84, which follows.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the setting process 4 at the time of disconnection. In the disconnection time setting process 4, each of the processes S601, S604, S611 to S614, and S621 executes the same process as the disconnection time setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment. Further, in the out-of-order setting process 4 of this modification, when 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g in the processing of S621 (S621), then the value of the fluctuation number counter 203g, the jackpot type of the previous jackpot, and From the fluctuation pattern type at the time of notifying the previous jackpot, the table defined at the corresponding position of the out-of-order selection table 202j is selected (S631). The fluctuation pattern type when the previous jackpot is notified is determined based on the information stored in the fluctuation type storage area 202h. Specifically, when selecting a jackpot fluctuation pattern type, for example, a pattern selection offset value is stored as information that can identify the fluctuation pattern type. When the process of S631 is completed, the process shifts to S601.

By this loss time setting process 4, in addition to the previous jackpot type and the number of lottery of special symbols, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of the previous jackpot can be referred to and the fluctuation pattern type can be selected. It is possible to execute a wider variety of variation pattern effects than the pachinko machine 10 of the above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the out-of-order setting process 4 (see FIG. 84) of this modification, the information stored in the hit type storage area 202f, the value of the fluctuation number counter 202g, and the fluctuation type storage area are performed regardless of the state of the gaming machine. It is configured to select the table for selecting the fluctuation type data based on the information about the fluctuation pattern type in the previous jackpot stored in 202h, but the high probability state of the special symbol or the normal symbol The fluctuation type data is stored based on the information stored in the hit type storage area 202f only in the time saving state, the value of the fluctuation number counter 202g, and the information on the fluctuation pattern type in the previous jackpot stored in the fluctuation type storage area 202h. It may be configured to select a table for selection. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, either the special figure 1 out-of-order selection table 202d2 or the special figure 2 out-of-order selection table 202d3 May be configured to be selected. As a result, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, a table for selecting the variable type data based only on the type of the entry port into which the ball has entered is selected from the variable type selection table 202d. Because it can be done, the judgment condition can be reduced. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and its modified example, when setting the variation pattern effect, not only the lottery result of the special symbol and the entrance port where the ball entered, but also the previous winning. The table is selected based on the jackpot type of the jackpot and the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. As a result, it is possible to execute a wide variety of variable pattern effects, so that it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and its modified example, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. .. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variable type data with the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the variable type counter value is set in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting to an offset value. Therefore, one of the most important processes in the game, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern effect, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and its modified example, the rank-up effect is configured to continue until the lottery of special symbols is performed 10 times at the longest, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until the lottery is performed four times, or it may be configured to continue until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 20 times.

Further, in the third embodiment and its modification, five ranks of rank D, rank C, rank B, rank A, and rank S are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a three-level rank may be provided, or a ten-level rank may be provided. Further, the rank-up does not necessarily have to be performed one step at a time, and a pattern may be provided in which the rank is raised by two steps or by three steps.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, it is configured to be notified that a transition to a high probability state of a special symbol is made when the maximum rank is reached, but the content to be notified is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, it may notify that a long period is selected as the time saving period of the ordinary symbol given after the big hit.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, the table selected from the variable type selection table 202d is configured so as not to change after the end of the rank-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery of special symbols is performed 100 times or more after the jackpot is finished, the tables to be selected may be different. As a result, when the variation pattern effect is executed 100 times or more, the variation pattern effect having a different mode is selected, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, the table to be selected may be changed when the lottery of the special symbol is performed 500 times or more or 1000 times or more after the jackpot is completed. As a result, it is possible to provide a mode of variable pattern production that cannot be seen unless the special symbol is drawn 500 times or 1000 times or more in succession. Therefore, even if the lottery of special symbols continues to be missed, the player can be motivated to continue the game by seeing different modes of variable pattern production.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the table for selecting the variable type data is selected from the variable type selection table 202d based on the previous jackpot type. However, the conditions for selecting a table are not limited to this. For example, the table may be selected according to the time zone in which the variation pattern effect is executed, the type of the background image at the time of execution, the remaining number of times in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the like. As a result, the variable pattern effect can be executed in a wide variety of modes, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, when the probabilistic jackpots A to H are won, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the variation pattern type in the mode of hit premium reach, but this is limited to this. It suffices as long as it informs the player that it will be in an advantageous state. For example, the premium reach may be selected when the result of the lottery this time is a big hit and the winning prize that becomes the big hit is reserved. As a result, by executing the variable pattern effect in the mode of hit premium reach, it is possible to make the player recognize that the big hits are continuous in an extremely short period of time, so that the player is greatly satisfied. Can be given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the modified example of the third embodiment, when the previous jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot A to H, the lottery result of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is out of order according to the mode of the variation pattern effect that notified the jackpot. The variation pattern type selected for is different, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a short-time hit A is won by a hit short reach or a hit long reach, the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which the rank-up occurs with a low probability (30%) in the rank-up period is selected. If the time-saving jackpot A is won by the hit super reach, the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which the rank-up occurs with a high probability (70%) in the rank-up period may be selected. Further, for example, when the probability variation jackpot A is won by the hit short reach or the hit long reach, the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which the rank up occurs with a high probability (70%) in the rank up period is selected. If the probability variation jackpot A is won by the hit super reach, the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which the rank up occurs with a low probability (30%) in the rank up period may be selected.

With this configuration, if a jackpot is notified by a hit short reach, the higher the rank, the higher the expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d8 will be selected, so the previous jackpot will definitely change. It is possible to raise the expectation for being a jackpot A (that is, shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol). In addition, when the jackpot is notified by the hit super reach, the expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d6 is selected increases as the effect of failing to rank up occurs, so the previous jackpot is a probability change jackpot A. It is possible to raise the expectation for being (that is, shifting to a high-probability state of a special symbol). That is, depending on the fluctuation pattern type when notifying the previous jackpot, the player may be requested to frequently raise the rank, or conversely, the player may be requested not to raise the rank. Therefore, different playability can be realized even with the same rank-up effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the gaming machines of each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, it is referred to in order to select the variable type data according to the type of the entry port into which the ball has entered, the number of reserved balls, and the like. It was configured so that a different table was selected as the table, but even if the lottery result of the special symbol was won, a different table was selected from the variable type selection table 202d according to the situation of the game. You may. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variable pattern effect for notifying the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Feature A group> (Set the data specified in the table using the label)
The control from a control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, a storage means for storing a plurality of information groups composed of one or a plurality of pieces of information for the control means to control, and the storage means thereof. The information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups used for control by the means, and the head position designating means for indicating the head position of a predetermined information group among the storage areas in which the plurality of information groups are stored are provided. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the information group selection means selects the information group of 1 based on the head position indicated by the head position designating means.

According to the gaming machine A1, a plurality of information groups composed of one or a plurality of pieces of information for the control means to control are stored in the storage means, and one information group used for control by the control means from the storage means is stored. , Selected by information group selection means. Among the storage areas in which a plurality of information groups are stored, the head position of a predetermined information group is indicated by the head position designating means, and the information group selecting means indicates the head position based on the head position indicated by the head position designating means. Information group 1 is selected.

As a result, it is sufficient to read the head position of a predetermined information group in the control process for designating one information group, and it is not necessary to individually describe the information constituting the information group in the program. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large amount of information on the program, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a value rewriting error. Therefore, there is an effect that the malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designating means is set. The predetermined means from the designated means, the head position of the predetermined information group indicated by the head position designating means, and the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designated means. The information group selection means includes a head position designated by the head position designating means and information calculated by the information number calculating means. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the information group of 1 is selected from the number of machines.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designating means is indicated by the designating means. From the start position of the predetermined information group indicated by the start position designating means and the start position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designation means, the predetermined information group is obtained by the information number calculation means. The number of constituent information is calculated. One information group is selected by the information group selection means from the head position designated by the head position designating means and the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means.

As a result, it is not necessary to numerically specify the number of information constituting the information group in the program. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model having a different number of information constituting the information group, the information group is configured. In the process using the number, the step of rewriting the number can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a correction error of the program creator.

In the gaming machine A2, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information, and each information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in the plurality of addresses one by one. A game machine A3 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses that can store information. Each piece of information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in the plurality of addresses.

As a result, the number of addresses in which information is stored matches the number of information constituting the information group, so that the number of information can be easily calculated by the information number calculation means based on the range of addresses in which information is stored. Has the effect of being able to calculate.

In the gaming machine A3, the first address among the plurality of addresses in which the plurality of the information groups are stored is associated with identification data for identifying the information group, and the head position is associated with the identification data. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the designation means and the designation means designate the start address of the information group based on the identification data.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, identification data for identifying the information group is associated with the first address among the plurality of addresses in which the plurality of information groups are stored, and the head position designating means, based on the identification data, And the start address of the information group is specified by the designated means.

As a result, the start position designation means and the designation means do not need to specify the start position by the address itself, so even if the storage address of each information group is changed when the program is diverted to another model. , It is not necessary to rewrite the start position in the control processing program that reads out each information group. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in rewriting the program.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, an acquisition means for acquiring random information, a comparison means for comparing the random information acquired by the acquisition means with the information group selected by the information group selection means, and a comparison means. The gaming machine A5 is characterized by comprising a privilege game granting means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the comparison result by the comparison means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the information group selected by the information group selection means are compared by the comparison means, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is given based on the comparison result by the comparison means. Whether or not to do so is determined by the privilege game granting means.

As a result, it is possible to randomly determine whether or not to grant the privileged game, which has the effect of giving the player a sense of fairness.

In the gaming machine A5, the comparison means compares the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means with the random information in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored. A featured gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means is random information in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored by the comparison means. Since they are compared, the information to be compared with the random information next can be specified by a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when comparing by the comparison means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A6, the comparison means includes the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the information selected by the information group selection means as many times as the number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculation means. The gaming machine A7, characterized in that it compares with each information constituting the group.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, random information acquired by the acquiring means as many times as the number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculating means and selected by the information group selection means. Since the comparison with each information constituting the information group is performed by the comparison means, it is not necessary to separately determine the number of comparisons. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when comparing by the comparison means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when it is determined by the privilege game granting means to grant the privilege game, the random information acquired by the acquisition means is deleted before the privilege game is granted. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that it is provided with erasing means.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when it is decided to grant the privileged game by the privileged game granting means, it is acquired before the privileged game is granted by the erasing means. Since the random information acquired by the means is deleted, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the lottery result corresponding to the granting of the privilege game from being illegally acquired from the outside.

<Feature B group> (Calculate the number of data using labels)
It is composed of a control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, a storage means for storing a plurality of information, and a plurality of information which are a part of the storage means and are used for the control means to perform control. It is provided with a storage area for storing a plurality of information groups and an information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups used for control by the control means from the storage area, and all the information groups are a specific number having the same number. In the storage area, each information constituting the plurality of information groups is sequentially stored in a plurality of addresses associated with the storage area without any free address. The information group selection means selects the information group based on the start address of a predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number of information groups. Game machine B1 to play.

According to the gaming machine B1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of pieces of information are stored by the storage means, and a plurality of information groups composed of a plurality of pieces of information used by the control means for performing control are stored in a storage area that is a part of the storage means. From the storage area, one information group used for control by the control means is selected by the information group selection means. All information groups are composed of a specific number of pieces of information that are the same number. In the storage area, each information constituting the plurality of information groups is sequentially stored in the plurality of addresses associated with the storage area without any free address. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the start address of a predetermined information group stored in the storage area and a specific number of information groups.

As a result, the information group can be specified only by specifying the start address of the predetermined information group and the specific number, so it is necessary to specify the start position of each information group in the program. No. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large number of values such as the start position of each information group on the program, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a value rewriting error. Therefore, there is an effect that the malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B1, of the plurality of information groups stored in order in the storage area, an address designation means indicating the start address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group, and the predetermined information group. The gaming machine B2 is characterized by comprising a specific number calculation means for calculating the specific number from the start address of the information group and the address indicated by the address designation means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the plurality of information groups stored in order in the storage area, the start address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group is indicated by the address designation means. A specific number is calculated by the specific number calculation means from the start address of the predetermined information group and the address indicated by the address designation means.

As a result, it is not necessary to input a specific number in the program as a numerical value. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model having a different specific number, the specific number is input in each process of controlling using the specific number. The repairing step can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in modifying the program.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the identification information storage means for storing a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from the plurality of information groups, and the identification information storage means for storing the plurality of identification data. The identification information selection means for selecting one identification data from the plurality of identification data is provided, and the information group selection means includes the identification data of 1 selected by the identification information selection means and the storage area. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the information group is selected based on the start address of the information group stored at the beginning of the information group and the specific number of information groups.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from a plurality of information groups is stored in the identification information storage means, and from the plurality of identification data stored in the identification information storage means, One identification data is selected by the identification information selection means. The information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the identification data of 1 selected by the identification information selection means, the start address of the information group stored at the beginning of the storage area, and the specific number.

As a result, when any information group stored in the storage area is referred to in each control process, it is not necessary to individually specify and refer to the address in which the information specified in the information group is stored. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when selecting the information group by the information group selection means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B3, the information group selection means is ahead of the start address of the information group stored at the beginning of the storage area by the value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the information group defined at the position of is selected.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, only the value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number of the head addresses of the information groups stored at the head of the storage area is equal to the head address of the information group. Since the information group defined at the previous position is selected by the information group selection means, the information group can be selected by a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when selecting the information group by the information group selection means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, an information storage means capable of storing information and an information storage control means for controlling the information storage means to store one of the information groups selected by the information group selection means. The gaming machine B5, wherein the control means controls based on the information group stored in the information storage means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one information group selected by the information group selection means is controlled to be stored in the information storage means by the information storage control means, and is controlled based on the information group stored in the information storage means. Control is performed by means.

As a result, the control means may perform control based on the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance, and there is an effect that the processing load of the control means can be reduced.

The gaming machine B5 includes a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery and a privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the identification information. The selection means selects the identification data of 1 based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the predetermined lottery result, and selects the identification data of 1 selected by the identification information selection means. The gaming machine B6 is provided with holding means for holding until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the information group selection means selects the information group based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the lottery performed by the lottery means results in a predetermined lottery result, the privilege game granting means grants a privilege game that is advantageous to the player. Further, based on the lottery performed by the lottery means having a predetermined lottery result, the identification data of 1 is selected by the identification information selection means, and the identification data of the 1 is held until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the holding means. Will be done. Then, the information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the information group can be quickly selected and set based on the identification data of 1 held by the holding means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to the delay in setting the information group.

The gaming machine B6 is provided with an erasing means for erasing the lottery result by the lottery means based on the selection of the identification data of 1 by the identification information selecting means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the lottery result by the lottery means is erased by the erasing means based on the selection of the identification data of 1 by the identification information selection means. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of lottery results corresponding to the granting of games from the outside.

In the gaming machine B7, the holding means holds the identification data of 1 until the condition for ending the granting of the privilege game is satisfied, and the information group selection means ends the granting of the privilege game. The gaming machine B8, characterized in that the information group is selected based on the condition that the conditions are satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification data of 1 is held by the holding means until the condition for ending the granting of the privilege game is satisfied. In addition, the information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the condition for ending the granting of the privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined lottery result from being continuously held for a relatively long period from the start of granting the privilege game to the end of the granting of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of illegally obtaining a predetermined lottery result from the outside while the privilege game is being granted.

A gaming machine B9 in any of the gaming machines B3 to B8, wherein the identification data has a smaller amount of data than the specific number of pieces of information constituting the information group.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B8, the identification data has a smaller amount of data than the specific number of information constituting the information group, so that a specific number of information is stored in the holding means. The amount of data held in the holding means can be reduced as compared with the case of holding the data. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the holding means can be reduced.

<Characteristic C group> (Whether or not the reserved ball can be added is determined by whether or not the most significant bit is 1.)
A control means that controls the game according to a predetermined control procedure, a first storage means that stores a plurality of predetermined data, and a predetermined data stored in the first storage means are selected, and the control means is the game. A second storage means that stores a plurality of set values for making settings related to, a first selection means that selects one predetermined data from the first storage means, and predetermined data selected by the first selection means. 1 The setting value of 1 is selected from the second storage means based on the conversion means that performs a predetermined conversion on the predetermined data according to the situation of the game and the predetermined data of the 1 that has been subjected to the predetermined conversion by the conversion means. The game machine C1 is provided with a second selection means for setting.

According to the gaming machine C1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data are stored by the first storage means, selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of set values for the control means to make settings related to the game are set by the second storage means. It will be remembered. A predetermined data of 1 is selected from the first storage means by the first selection means, and whether or not the predetermined data selected by the first selection means contains specific information is determined by the specific information discriminating means. .. When it is determined by the specific information determining means that the predetermined data of 1 contains specific information, the conversion means performs a predetermined conversion on the predetermined data of 1, and the conversion means performs the predetermined conversion. Based on the predetermined data of 1, the set value of 1 is selected and set from the second storage means by the second selection means.

As a result, different conversions can be performed on the predetermined data of 1 according to the situation of the game by the conversion means, so that the second selection means can select different setting values according to the conversion contents. Therefore, the number of predetermined data stored in the first storage means can be made smaller than the number of set values stored in the second storage means, so that the capacity of the first storage means can be reduced. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine C1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the specific information is not included in the predetermined data of 1, the second storage means to 1 of 1 is based on the predetermined data of 1. The gaming machine C2 comprising a third selection means for selecting and setting a set value.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the predetermined data of 1 does not include the specific information, the third is based on the predetermined data of 1. Since the set value of 1 is selected and set from the second storage means by the storage means, the conversion by the conversion means can be omitted when the predetermined data of 1 that does not include specific information is selected. .. Therefore, there is an effect that processing addition can be reduced when specific information is not included in the predetermined data of 1.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the specific information determining means determines that the specific information is included in the predetermined data of 1 when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1. The gaming machine C3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1, the specific information is included in the predetermined data of 1 by the specific information determining means. Since it is determined that the data is present, it is not necessary to determine the data specified in the bits other than the most significant bit when determining whether or not specific information is included, and the determination is performed by a simple process. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load by the specific information discriminating means can be reduced.

In the game machine C3, an entry port into which a game ball can enter, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means based on the entry of the game ball into the entry port, and a dynamic display execution means thereof. When a game ball newly enters the ball entrance while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, the number of times the game ball newly enters up to a predetermined value. The conversion means is characterized in that the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is set to 0, and the count value of the counting means is added to the predetermined data of 1. Game machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the entrance where the game ball can enter, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information is dynamically displayed. When a game ball newly enters the ball entrance in the meantime, the number of times the game ball newly enters is counted by the counting means up to a predetermined value. The conversion means sets the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 to 0, and the count value of the counting means is added.

Thereby, different set values can be selected by the second selection means according to the count value of the counting means. Therefore, since various settings can be realized, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C4, the plurality of set values stored in the second storage means include at least information regarding the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, at least the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is set in the plurality of set values stored in the second storage means. Since the information about the information is included, the dynamic display can be executed in the form of the dynamic display of various identification information having different display periods. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C5, the second selection means selects from the second storage means the set value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information having a shorter display time as the count value of the counting means is larger. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being a machine to play.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the larger the counting value of the counting means, the second the set value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information having a shorter display time by the second selection means. Since it is selected from the two storage means, it is possible to prevent continuous dynamic display of the identification information having a long display time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being continuously given a large disappointment due to a long display time and a series of out-of-order productions, which improves the player's interest in the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, an information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is provided, and the first selection means is based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the predetermined data of 1 is selected from the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means, the first selection means selects the predetermined data of 1 from the first storage means.

As a result, the predetermined data can be given randomness, so that the set value selected based on the predetermined data can also be given randomness. Therefore, since the game settings are randomly determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the settings, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

<Characteristic D group> (Variation pattern table is determined based on the design and rotation speed)
A combination of a dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays identification information on a display means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a plurality of predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player when any combination of the above appears, and the dynamic display execution after the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means is completed. The dynamic display executing means includes a number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the means, and the dynamic display executing means is the number of times counted by the number counting means and the previous time by the privilege game giving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the mode of dynamically displaying the identification information is determined based on the information determined when the privileged game is given.

According to the gaming machine D1, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the identification information is dynamically displayed in advance in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. When any combination of the predetermined combinations of identification information appears, the privileged game is given to the player by the privileged game giving means. The number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means is counted by the number counting means after the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means is completed. The mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display executing means based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is given by the privilege game granting means. Will be done.

As a result, it is possible to determine a wide variety of modes of dynamic display of the identification information according to the information determined when the previous privilege game is given and the number of times counted by the number counting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine D1, the dynamic display executing means obtains the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means, specific information based on the identification information that appears when the previous privilege game is given, and the identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined based on the mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means at the time of appearance. D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the number of times counted by the number counting means, specific information based on the identification information that appeared when the previous privilege game was given, and the identification thereof. Identification because the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display execution means based on the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when the information is displayed. A wide variety of modes of dynamic display of information can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the information group composed of a plurality of information regarding the mode of dynamic display of the identification information corresponds to the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. A plurality of information constituting the information group is stored in association with the count value of the number-of-times counting means, and the dynamic display executing means is said to have the information group storage means attached and stored. One information group is selected from the information group storage means based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. The gaming machine D3, which is used for determining the mode of dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine D3, an information group composed of a plurality of pieces of information regarding the mode of dynamic display of the identification information is associated with the information determined when the previous award game is given by the award game giving means. It is stored by the information group storage means. A plurality of pieces of information constituting the information group are stored in association with the count value of the number-of-times counting means. Based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the previous award game is given by the award game giving means, the information group storage means 1 information group is generated by the dynamic display executing means. It is selected and used to determine the mode of dynamic display of the identification information.

As a result, the dynamic display execution means can determine the mode of dynamic display of the identification information only by selecting the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance. There is an effect that the processing load of the process to be determined can be reduced.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, a ball entry port through which the game ball can enter is provided, and the dynamic display execution means becomes a display means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry port. A gaming machine D4 characterized by dynamically displaying identification information.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the dynamic display executing means is based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the entrance where the gaming ball can enter. Since the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, the player can easily trigger the dynamic display of the identification information simply by confirming whether or not the game ball has entered the ball entrance. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the game machine D4, a plurality of the entry ports are provided, and the dynamic display executing means includes the type of the entry port into which the game ball has entered and the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the mode of dynamically displaying the identification information is determined based on the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. ..

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D4, a plurality of entrances are provided, the type of the entrance for the game ball to enter, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and the privilege. Since the mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display execution means based on the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the game granting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed. A wide variety of modes can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, after the granting of the privileged game by the privileged game granting means is completed, the first gaming state or the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting either game state is provided, and the dynamic display execution means can execute the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode when the game state is the second game state. The gaming machine D6 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the awarding of the award game by the award game awarding means is completed, either the first game state or the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is played by the game state setting means. Set to state. When the gaming state is the second gaming state, the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode.

As a result, by confirming whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific mode, the player can determine whether or not the gaming state is the second gaming state. Careful observation can be made regarding the mode of dynamic display of information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D6, the dynamic display executing means can execute the dynamic display of the identification information in the specific mode when the counting value of the number counting means is a specific value. The gaming machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, when the counting value of the number-of-times counting means is a specific value, the dynamic display executing means dynamically displays the identification information in a specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode when the number-of-times counting value is a specific value. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

In the gaming machine D7, when the counting value of the number-of-times counting means is a specific value and the gaming state is the first gaming state, the dynamic display executing means is described in a mode different from the specific mode. The gaming machine D8, characterized in that it executes dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D7, when the counting value of the number-of-times counting means is a specific value and the gaming state is the first gaming state, a specific mode is determined by the dynamic display executing means. Since the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a mode different from that of the above, it is possible to suppress the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode in the first gaming state. Therefore, even though the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific mode, the player does not have a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player feels distrust of the gaming machine or the hall. It has the effect of suppressing the storage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, an information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on the establishment of a specific condition is provided, and the dynamic display execution means includes the random information acquired by the information acquisition means. , The mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined based on the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. The gaming machine D9 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the acquired random information and the number of times are counted. The mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display executing means based on the number of times counted by the means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. Therefore, it is possible to give randomness to the mode of dynamic display of the determined identification information. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in an unexpected manner of the player, so that the player On the other hand, it has the effect of giving unexpectedness.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines notify the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening by displaying a plurality of symbols on a display means such as a liquid crystal display. In such a gaming machine, when a plurality of variablely displayed symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific combination, a so-called hit state that is advantageous to the player is entered. In this symbol variation, if one more symbol is aligned, the state of being a big hit is continued for a longer time than usual, so-called reach state is generated, a character is made to appear, and so on. By doing so, the expectation of the player is raised (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714).
However, as the mode of symbol variation is diversified, the amount of data stored in the gaming machine increases, which causes a problem that the capacity of the storage means mounted on the gaming machine is increased.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of the storage means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is provided with a control means for controlling the game according to a predetermined control procedure, a first storage means for storing a plurality of predetermined data, and the first storage means thereof. A second storage means that is selected based on the stored predetermined data and stores a plurality of set values for the control means to make settings related to the game, and a first storage means that selects one predetermined data from the first storage means. The specific information discriminating means for determining whether or not specific information is included in the predetermined data selected by the 1-selecting means and the first-selecting means, and the specific information discriminating means for identifying the predetermined data in 1 above. A conversion means that performs a predetermined conversion on the predetermined data of the above 1 according to the situation of the game when it is determined that the information of the above 1 is included, and the predetermined data of the above 1 that has been subjected to the predetermined conversion by the conversion means. A second selection means for selecting and setting the set value of 1 from the second storage means based on the above.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the predetermined data in the above 1 does not include the specific information. A third selection means for selecting and setting the set value of 1 from the second storage means based on predetermined data is provided.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the specific information discriminating means is used for the predetermined data of the above 1 when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of the 1 is 1. It is determined that the specific information is included.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data are stored by the first storage means, selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of set values for the control means to make settings related to the game are set by the second storage means. It will be remembered. A predetermined data of 1 is selected from the first storage means by the first selection means, and whether or not the predetermined data selected by the first selection means contains specific information is determined by the specific information discriminating means. .. When it is determined by the specific information determining means that the predetermined data of 1 contains specific information, the conversion means performs a predetermined conversion on the predetermined data of 1, and the conversion means performs the predetermined conversion. Based on the predetermined data of 1, the set value of 1 is selected and set from the second storage means by the second selection means.
As a result, different conversions can be performed on the predetermined data of 1 according to the situation of the game by the conversion means, so that the second selection means can select different setting values according to the conversion contents. Therefore, the number of predetermined data stored in the first storage means can be made smaller than the number of set values stored in the second storage means, so that the capacity of the first storage means can be reduced. There is an effect.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, when it is determined by the specific information discriminating means that the predetermined data of the 1 does not contain the specific information. Since the set value of 1 is selected and set from the second storage means by the third storage means based on the predetermined data of 1, when the predetermined data of 1 that does not include specific information is selected, The conversion by the conversion means can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that processing addition can be reduced when specific information is not included in the predetermined data of 1.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1, the specific information discriminating means 1 Since it is determined that the predetermined data of the above contains specific information, the data specified in the bits other than the most significant bit is determined when determining whether or not the specific information is included. There is no need to do so, and the determination can be made with a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load by the specific information discriminating means can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
110 Main controller (control means)
202 ROM (memorize means)
202a First random number table (storage means)
203 RAM (setting value storage means)
S311, S313 Part of the data group setting means, address identification means
S312, S314 Part of the data group setting means

Claims (3)

A control means for controlling the game according to a predetermined control procedure,
A first storage means that stores a plurality of predetermined data,
A second storage means selected based on predetermined data stored in the first storage means and storing a plurality of set values for the control means to make settings related to the game.
A first selection means for selecting 1 predetermined data from the first storage means, and
Specific information determining means for determining whether or not specific information is included in the predetermined data selected by the first selection means, and
When the specific information determination means determines that the specific information is included in the predetermined data of 1, the conversion means of performing a predetermined conversion of the predetermined data of 1 according to the situation of the game, and
A gaming machine including a second selection means for selecting and setting the set value of 1 from the second storage means based on the predetermined data of 1 that has been subjected to a predetermined conversion by the conversion means. .. When it is determined by the specific information determining means that the specific information is not included in the predetermined data of 1, the set value of 1 is selected from the second storage means based on the predetermined data of 1. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a third selection means for setting. The specific information determining means is characterized in that when the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 is 1, it is determined that the specific information is included in the predetermined data of 1. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

Images